Gre110 PDF

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRE110
© TOSHIBA Corporation 2013

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver. 5.3)
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRE110. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or serious
injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DANGER
• Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
• Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated is
dangerous.
• Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the circuit just after switching off the power supply. It takes
approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
CAUTION
• Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
• Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust detailed
in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
• Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
• Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
• Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
• Power supply
If power supply has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power.
This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
• Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
• Disposal
When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
 2 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 6
2. Application Notes 8
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection 8
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection 16
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection 23
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection 34
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection 36
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection 38
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection 40
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection 43
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush 46
2.10 Trip Signal Output 49
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits 51
2.12 CT Requirements 53
2.13 Autoreclose 55
3. Technical Description 62
3.1 Hardware Description 62
3.2 Input and Output Signals 64
3.3 Automatic Supervision 69
3.4 Recording Function 75
3.5 Metering Function 78
3.6 Control Function 78
4. User Interface 79
4.1 Outline of User Interface 79
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 82
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 150
4.4 MODBUS Interface 150
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 150
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication 150
4.7 Clock Function 151
4.8 Special Mode 152
5. Installation 153
5.1 Receipt of Relays 153
5.2 Relay Mounting 153
 3 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 157

5.4 Handling Precautions 157
5.5 External Connections 157
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE110, S3-GRE110 157
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 158
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 158
6.2 Cautions 158
6.3 Preparations 159
6.4 Hardware Tests 160
6.5 Function Test 162
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 172
6.7 Maintenance 174
7. Putting Relay into Service 177
Appendix A 178
Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal
Model to IEC60255-149 178
Appendix B 184
Signal List 184
Appendix C 192
Event Record Items 192
Appendix D 197
Binary Output Default Setting List 197
Appendix E 200
Relay Menu Tree 200
Appendix F 211
Case Outline 211
Appendix G 214
Typical External Connection 214
Appendix H 224
Relay Setting Sheet 224
Appendix I 242
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 242
Appendix J 246
Return Repair Form 246
Appendix K 251
Technical Data 251
 4 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix L 257
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 257
Appendix M 260
Modbus: Interoperability 260
Appendix N 290
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 290
Appendix O 297
PLC Default setting 297
Appendix P 299
Inverse Time Characteristics 299
Appendix Q 305
IEC61850: Interoperability 305
Appendix R 347
Ordering 347
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.5.3)
 5 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. Introduction
GRE110 series relays provide non-directional overcurrent protection for radial distribution
Medium Voltage class networks, and back-up protection for distribution networks.
Note: GRE110 series relays are non-directional, and are applicable to systems where fault current
flows in a fixed direction, or flows in both directions but there is a significant difference in
magnitude. In systems where a fault current flows in both directions and there is not a significant
difference in the magnitude of the fault current, the directional overcurrent protection provided
by GRE140 facilitates fault selectivity.
The GRE110 series provides the following protection schemes in all models.
• Overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults with definite time or inverse time
characteristics
• Instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults
The GRE110 series provides the sensitive earth fault protection scheme depending on the models.
The GRE110 series provides the following functions for all models.
• Two settings groups
• Configurable binary inputs and outputs
• Circuit breaker control and condition monitoring
• Trip circuit supervision
• Autoreclosing function
• Automatic self-supervision
• Menu-based HMI system
• Configurable LED indication
• Metering and recording functions
• Front mounted USB port for local PC communications
• Rear mounted RS485 serial ports for communications
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRE110 series and identifies the functions to be provided by
each member.
 6 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions
Model Number GRE110 -

400 401 402 420 421 422 820 821
Current input 3P + E 3P + E(*) + SE 2P + Vo + SE
Binary Input port 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6
Binary Output port 4 4 8 4 4 8 4 4
IDMT O/C (OC1, OC2)        
DT O/C (OC1 – 4)        
Instantaneous O/C (OC1 – 4)        
IDMT Earth Fault O/C (EF1, EF2)      
DT Earth Faiult O/C (EF1 – 4)      
SEF protection (SEF1 – 4)     
Phase U/C        
Thermal O/L        
NPS O/C      
Broken conductor protection      
CBF protection        
Inrush current detector        
Cold load protection        
Auto-reclose        
Trip circuit supervision        
Self supervision        
CB state monitoring        
Trip counter alarm        
∑Iy alarm        
CB operate time alarm        
Fault records        
Event records        
Disturbance records        
Modbus Communication        
IEC60850-5-103 Communication        
IEC 61850 communication (option) () ()
Case width (mm) 149 149 223 149 149 223 149 149
E: current from residual circuit or CT SE: current from core balance CT 3P: three-phase current
(*)
E : current (Io) calculated from three-phase current in relay internal DT: definite time
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time O/C: overcurrent protection U/C: undercurrent protection
OC∗: phase overcurrent element O/L: overload protection NPS: negative phase sequence
EF∗: earth fault element SEF: sensitive earth fault CBF: circuit breaker failure
Model 400 provides three phase and earth fault overcurrent protection.
Model 420 provides three phase, earth fault and sensitive earth fault protection.
 7 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2. Application Notes
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
GRE110 provides protection for radial distribution networks with phase fault and earth fault
overcurrent elements OC1 to OC4 and EF1 to EF4*. The protection of local and downstream
terminals is coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.
*at model 400, 401 and 402, the earth fault current input may be connected either in the residual
circuit of the phase CTs, or alternatively a dedicated earth fault CT may be used. In the case of
connection in the residual circuit of the phase CTs, the settings of the phase CT ratio OCCT and the
earth fault CT ratio EFCT should be equal. On the other hand, where a dedicated earth fault CT is
applied, then the settings of OCCT and EFCT should NOT be equal, and in this case the measuring
range of earth fault current is limited to 20A maximum (see section 2.2.5).
** On GRE110-820 and 821 models, current inputs are A phase and C phase only. The B phase
element is currucurate from A phase and C phase current for metering function. But B phase
cullcurated current is not for protection and recording function. So the B phase current is not
operate at the some scheme logic.
2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection

In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without being
substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides reasonably fast
tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults can occur.
Where ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power source) is small compared with that of
the protected section ZL, there is an appreciable difference between the current for a fault at the far
end of the section (ES/(ZS+ZL), ES: source voltage), and the current for a fault at the near end
(ES/ZS). When operating time is inversely proportional to the current, the relay operates faster for
a fault at the end of the section nearer the power source, and the operating time ratio for a fault at
the near end to the far end is ZS/(ZS + ZL).
The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1.1 for radial networks with
several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the downstream
section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection
The OC1 and EF1 elements for stage-1 have IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1) in
accordance with IEC 60255-151:
 8 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
  
 k  + c (1)
t = TMS × 
 

 I
 Is
α
( )
− 1 
 
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.2.
In addition to the above nine curve types, OC1 and EF1 can provide user configurable IDMT
curves. If required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants k, α
and c. The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants. OC2 and EF2
for stage-2 also provide the same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1) (Time Multiplier = 1)
1000 100
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
LTI
NI 1
MI
1 VI
VI
CO2
CO8
EI
EI
0.1 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics

Programmable Reset Characteristics
OC1 and EF1 have a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time delayed, or
dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
 9 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
grading between relays at various points in the scheme.

The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an
upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no intentional
delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the element returns
to its reset condition.
If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing tripping,
then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls below the
reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of the timing
function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset

The dependent time resetting characteristic is applied only to the IEEE/US operate characteristics,
and is defined by the following equation:
 
 kr 
t = RTMS ×  β
 (2)
   
1 −  I I  
  S  
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
k, β, c = constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.

The dependent time reset characteristic also can provide user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [M∗∗∗] to “C” and set the curve defining constants kr and β. Table
2.1.1 shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
 10 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Description IEC ref. k α c kr β

IEC Normal Inverse A 0.14 0.02 0 - -
IEC Very Inverse B 13.5 1 0 - -
IEC Extremely Inverse C 80 2 0 - -
UK Long Time Inverse - 120 1 0 - -
IEEE Moderately Inverse D 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85 2
IEEE Very Inverse E 19.61 2 0.491 21.6 2
IEEE Extremely Inverse F 28.2 2 0.1217 29.1 2
US CO8 Inverse - 5.95 2 0.18 5.95 2
US CO2 Short Time Inverse - 0.02394 0.02 0.01694 2.261 2
User configurable curve - 0.00 – 0.00 – 0.000 – 0.00 – 0.00 –
300.00 5.00 5.000 300.00 5.00
Note: kr and β are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
IEEE Reset Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000.00
100.00
Time (s)
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1 1
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics
2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the
 11 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is
applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring elements
OC1 and EF1 and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective protection
with graded setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination with the
downstream section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2.1.4 As is clear in the figure, the nearer
to the power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section. This is
undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
2.1.3 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the phase fault and earth fault overcurrent
protection with selective definite time or inverse time characteristic.
The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to “D”. Definite time
overcurrent elements OC1-D and EF1-D are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection
respectively, and trip signal OC1 TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given through the delayed pick-up timer
TOC1 and TEF1.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE” or
“US” according to the IDMT characteristic to employ. Inverse time overcurrent elements OC1-I
and EF1-I are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection respectively, and trip signal OC1
TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation etc. , and can block the OC1-D element by the scheme switch [OC1-2F]
respectively. See Section 2.9.
The signals OC1 HS and EF1 HS are used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar
protection (refer to Section 2.12).
These protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] and [EF1EN] or binary input
signals OC1 BLOCK and EF1 BLOCK.
OC2 and EF2 are provided with the same logic of OC1 and EF1.
 12 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TOC1
A t 0 102
& OC1-A TRIP
OC1 ≥1
B 103
-D t 0 OC1-B TRIP
&
C ≥1
t 0 104
& OC1-C TRIP
≥1
[OC1-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
+ “Block” 101
& 51
OC1-A ≥1 OC1 TRIP
ICD ≥1
[MOC1] 52
+ OC1-B
"D" ≥1
53
OC1-C
"IEC" ≥1
"IEEE" 88
A OC1-A HS
"US"
OC1 89
B OC1-B HS
"C" HS 90
A C OC1-C HS
&
OC1 B
-I &
C
&
[OC1EN
+ &
"ON"
OC1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.5 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection OC1
TEF1
EF1-D t 0 117
& EF1 TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF1-2F]
+ 63
“Block” &
EF1
ICD ≥1
[MEF1]
+
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF1-I &
[EF1EN]
+ 91
"ON" & EF1HS EF1 HS
EF1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.6 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection EF1
 13 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.1.4 Settings
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase and residual overcurrent protection
and their setting ranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
OCCT 1 - 20000 1 400 CT ratio for 3-phase current
EFCT 1 - 20000 1 200 CT ratio for earth-fault curret
OC1 0.10 – 25.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A OC1 threshold setting
TOC1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MOC1] =
IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC1 definite time setting. Required if [MOC1] =
DT.
TOC1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MOC1] = IEC or if [OC1R] = DEF.
TOC1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [OC1R] = DEP.
EF1 0.05 – 25.00 A 0.01 A 0.30 A EF1 threshold setting
TEF1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if [MEF1] =
IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF1 definite time setting. Required if [MEF1] =DT.
TEF1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MEF1] = IEC or if [EF1R] = DEF.
TEF1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 dependent time delayed reset time multiplier.
Required if [EF1R] = DEP.
[OC1EN] Off / On On OC1 Enable
[MOC1] D / IEC / IEEE / US / C D OC1 characteristic
[MOC1C] OC1 inverse curve type.
MOC1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOC1] = IEC.
MOC1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
MOC1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOC1] = US.
[OC1R] DEF / DEP DEF OC1 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC1] =
IEEE or US.
[OC1-2F] NA / Block NA OC1 2f block Enable
[EF1EN] Off / On On EF1 Enable
[MEF1] D / IEC / IEEE / US / C D EF1 characteristic
[MEF1C] EF1 inverse curve type.
MEF1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MEF1] = IEC.
MEF1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
MEF1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MEF1] = US.
[EF1R] DEF / DEP DEF EF1 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF1] =
IEEE or US.
[EF1-2F] NA / Block NA EF1 2f block Enable
 14 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent protection

Current setting
In Figure 2.1.7, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a fault
on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at
remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the next
section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. The setting is normally 1 to 1.5 times or less
of the minimum fault current.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate
on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current
transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.
A B C
F1 F2 F3
Figure 2.1.7 Current Settings in Radial Feeder
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to the relays on adjacent feeders.
Consider a minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a
maximum. In Figure 2.1.7, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A
may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may
sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time
coordination must also be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for the
small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a fault
at point F2 in Figure 2.1.7.
Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm
where, T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2: relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin
 15 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent protection

Current setting
The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote
end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault at
the remote end of the next feeder section.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not operate
on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the current
transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the selection of
instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to operate for large
motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.
Time setting
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way as
explained in “Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection”.
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, definite time overcurrent elements OC2 to
OC4 and EF2 to EF4 provide instantaneous overcurrent protection. OC2 and EF2 also provide the
same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively. Each
element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. The phase fault
elements operate on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

When they are applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of the
protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power
source), and the magnitude of the fault current in the local end fault is much greater (3 times or
more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS≧3, for example) than that in the remote end fault under the condition that
ZS is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the operating zone of the
elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous and selective protection
can be applied.
This high setting overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near the
power source where the setting is feasible, but the longest tripping times would otherwise have to be
accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.2.1 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases as
ZS increases.
 16 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.2.1 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC2 to OC4 is obtained
in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF2 to EF4 is obtained
in the event of single phase earth faults.
2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.2.2,
well coordinated protection with the fuses in branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for the
feeder faults can be provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with
time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.
Fuse
GRE110
Figure 2.2.2 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses
Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3 (or
EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.2.3, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
 17 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Time (s)
OC1
OC2
OC3
Fuse
Current (amps)
Figure 2.2.3 Staged Definite Time Protection
2.2.3 Scheme Logic

As shown in Figure 2.2.4 to Figure 2.2.9, OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 have independent scheme
logics. OC2 and EF2 provide the same logic of OC1 and EF1. OC3 and EF3 give trip signals OC3
TRIP and EF3 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TEF3. OC4 and EF4 are used to
output alarm signals OC4 ALARM and EF4 ALARM. Each trip and alarm can be blocked by
incorporated scheme switches [OC2EN] to [EF4EN] and binary input signals OC2 BLOCK to EF4
BLOCK. OC*-D and EF*-D elements can be also blocked by the scheme switches [OC*-2F] and
[EF*-2F]. See Section 2.9.
TOC2
A t 0 106
& OC2-A TRIP
OC2 ≥1
B 107
-D t 0 OC2-B TRIP
&
C ≥1
t 0 108
& OC2-C TRIP
≥1
[OC2-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
+ “Block” 105
& 54
OC2-A ≥1 OC2 TRIP
ICD ≥1
[MOC2] 55
+ OC2-B
"D" ≥1
56
OC2-C
"IEC" ≥1
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
A &
OC2 B
-I &
C
&
[OC2EN
+ &
"ON"
OC2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC2
 18 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TOC3
57
A t 0 110
& OC3-A TRIP
58
OC3 B t 0 111
59 & OC3-B TRIP
C
& t 0 112
OC3-C TRIP
[OC3-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
109
+ “Block”
& ≥1 OC3 TRIP
ICD
[OC3EN]
+ &
"ON"
OC3 BLOCK 1
TOC4
60
A t 0 114 OC4-A
& ALARM
61
OC4 B t 0 115
& OC4-B
62
C ALARM
& t 0 116 OC4-C
ALARM
[OC4-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
113
+ “Block”
& ≥1 OC4
ICD ALARM
[OC4EN]
+ &
"ON"
OC4 BLOCK 1
TEF2
EF2-D t 0 118
& EF2 TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF2-2F]
+ 64
“Block” &
EF1
ICD ≥1
[MEF2]
+
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF2-I &
[EF2EN]
+
"ON" &
EF2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.7 Earth fault Protection EF2
 19 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TEF3
65
EF3 t 0 119
& EF3 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF3-2F]
+ “Block” &
ICD
[EF3EN]
+
"ON" &
EF3 BLOCK 1
TEF4
66
EF4 t 0 120
& EF4 ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF4-2F]
+ “Block” &
ICD
[EF4EN]
+
"ON" &
EF4 BLOCK 1
2.2.4 Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the instantaneous and definite time overcurrent
protection and their setting ranges.
TOC2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC2 definite time setting.
TOC2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC or if [OC2R] = DEF.
TOC2RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP.
TOC3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC3 definite time setting.

TOC4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC4definite time setting.
 20 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

TEF2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF2 definite time setting.
TEF2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC or if [EF2R] = DEF.
TEF2RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP.
TEF3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF3 definite time setting.
TEF4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF4 definite time setting.
[OC2EN] Off / On Off OC2 Enable
[MOC2] D / IEC / IEEE / US / C D OC2 characteristic
[MOC2C] OC2 inverse curve type.
MOC2C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOC2] = IEC.
MOC2C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOC2] = IEEE.
MOC2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOC2] = US.
[OC2R] DEF / DEP DEF OC2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MOC2] = IEEE or US.
[EF2EN] Off / On Off EF2 Enable
[MEF2] D / IEC / IEEE / US / C D EF2 characteristic
[MEF2C] EF2 inverse curve type.
MEF2C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MEF2] = IEC.
MEF2C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MEF2] = IEEE.
MEF2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MEF2] = US.
[EF2R] DEF / DEP DEF OC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2]
= IEEE or US.
 21 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection

On the models 400, 401 and 402, the earth fault current input may be connected either in the
residual circuit of the phase CTs, or alternatively a dedicated earth fault CT may be used. In the
case of connection in the residual circuit of the phase CTs, the settings of the phase CT ratio OCCT
and the earth fault CT ratio EFCT should be equal. On the other hand, where a dedicated earth fault
CT or only earth fault CT (no 3 phase CT) are applied, then the settings of OCCT and EFCT may
NOT be equal. The connection methods are illustrated in figure 2.2.10.
The maximum setting value of the earth fault protection is 20.00A in case of elements EF1 and
EF2, and 100.00A for EF3 and EF4. However, it should be noted that, in the case that a dedicated
earth fault CT connection is used, the measuring range of earth fault current is limited to 20A
maximum.
TB1 TB1 TB1

Ia 1 Ia 1 1
2 Ia 2 Ia 2 Ia
Ib 3 Ib 3 3
4 Ib 4 Ib 4 Ib
Ic 5 Ic 5 5
6 Ic 6 Ic 6 Ic
Ie 7 Ie Ie 7 Ie Ie 7 Ie
8 from 8 from 8
Residual
current Zero-phase Zero-phase
current current
transformer transformer
(a)for Residual current (b)for Zero-phase current (c)for only Zero-phase

detection wiring transformer wiring current transformer wiring
Figure 2.2.10 Earth fault current detection wiring
2.2.6 CT Wiring of 2 phase CT

When applying 2 phase CT’s for the main circuit, the relay input wiring is as shown in Figure
2.2.11. This wiring derives phase B vector current from phase A and phase C vector current as
shown in Figure 2.2.12. If zero phase current occur or 3 phase current is unbalanced, the phase B
current measurement value will not be correct.
When applying 2 phase CT’s, the earth fault current input cannot be connected to the residual
circuit of the phase CT’s. This wiring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
TB1
1
Ia 2 Ia Ia
3
4 Ib Ia+Ic
5 Ic
Ic 6
Ie 7 Ie
from 8
Zero-phase
current Ic Ib=-(Ia+Ic)
transformer
Figure 2.2.11 2 phase CT wiring Figure 2.2.12 Phase B composition of vectors
 22 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through high
impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected in earth faults. Furthermore, the
SEF elements of GRE110 are also applicable to the “standby earth fault protection” and the “high
impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers”.
The SEF elements provide more sensitive setting ranges (1 mA to 250mA) than the regular earth
fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of mal-operation due to
harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore the SEF
elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Models 420, 421, 422, 820 and 821 which have a dedicated earth
fault input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage earth fault protection.
Stage 2 of the two-stage earth fault protection is used only for the standby earth fault protection.
SEF2 provides inverse time or definite time selective earth fault protection. SEF3 and SEF4
provide definite time earth fault protection.
When SEF employs IEEE, US or C (Configurable) inverse time characteristics, two reset modes
are available: definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is
employed, definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current during
normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection

The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection, and
ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with a
time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers and
feeder transformers.
Restricted earth fault protection

The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.3.1, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
 23 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.
Power
Transformer
Varistor
Stabilising GRE110
Resistor SEF input
Figure 2.3.1 High Impedance REF
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 to Figure 2.3.5 show the scheme logic of inverse time or definite time selective earth
fault protection and definite time earth fault protection on model 420, 421 and -422.
In Figures 2.3.2 and 2.3.3, the definite time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2] to
“D”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and stage 1 trip signal
SEF1-S1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The element SEF2 is enabled and
trip signal SEF2 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE2.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”,
“US” or “C” according to the inverse time characteristic to employ. The element SEF1 is enabled
and stage 1 trip signal SEF1-S1 TRIP is given. The element SEF2 is enabled and trip signal SEF2
TRIP is given.
The SEF1 protection provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE1
S2.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1-D or SEF1-I continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the
stage 2 trip signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
The signal SEF1 HS is used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar protection
(refer to Section 2.9)
SEF protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1EN] and [SE2EN] or binary input signal
SEF1 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK. Stage 2 trip of standby earth fault protection can be disabled by
the scheme switch [SE1S2].
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF*-D element by sheme switch [SE*-2F]. See
Section 2.9
In Figures 2.3.4 and 2.3.5, SEF3 and SEF4 protections are programmable for instantaneous or
definite time delayed operations with setting of delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 and give
trip signals SEF3 TRIP and SEF4 ALARM.
 24 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TSE1
SEF1-D t 0 121
& SEF1 TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
SE1-2F]
+ “Block” 67
& SEF1
ICD ≥1
TS1S2
[MSE1] [SE1S2] t 0 122
&
+ + SEF1-S2 TRIP
"D" "ON" 0.00 - 300.00s
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
92
"C" SEF1HS SEF1 HS
SEF1-I &
[SE1EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.2 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF1
TSE2
SEF2-D t 0 123
& SEF2 TRIP
≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
SE2-2F]
+ “Block” 68
& SEF2
ICD [MSE2] ≥1
+
"D"
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
SEF2-I &
[SE2EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.3 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF2
 25 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
69 TSE3
SEF3 t 0 124
& SEF3 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE3-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[SE3EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF3 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.4 Definite Time SEF Protection SEF3
70 TSE4
SEF4 t 0 125
& SEF4
ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[SE4EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF4 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.5 Definite Time SEF Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
SECT 1 - 20000 1 150 CT ration for sensitive earth fault current
SE1 0.001 – 0.250 A 0.001 A 0.010 A SEF1 threshold setting
TSE1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*1) 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] =DT.
TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE1] =IEC or if [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
TS1S2 0.00 – 300.00 s (*1) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
TSE2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF2 definite time setting.
TSE2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE2] =IEC or if [SE2R] = DEF.
 26 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

TSE3 0.00 – 300.00 s (*1) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF3 definite time setting.
TSE4 0.00 – 300.00 s (*1) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF4 definite time setting.
[SE1EN] Off / On On SEF1 Enable
[MSE1] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C D SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C] SEF1 inverse curve type.
MSE1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
MSE1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
MSE1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2] Off / On Off SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[SE2EN] Off / On Off SEF2 Enable
[MSE2] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C D SEF2 characteristic
(*1) Time setting of TSE1 – TSE4 should be set in consideration of the SEF drop-off time
80-100ms.
SEF
SEF is set smaller than the available earth fault current and larger than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to the unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the feeder,
but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error
in phase faults.
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
High impedance REF protection

CT saturation under through fault conditions results in voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
 27 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Transformer
Circuit
IF
Varistor ZM ≈0
M?0
RCT
VS
Stabilising GRE110
RS Resistor RL
Figure 2.3.4 Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition
The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF×(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to Vs. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, Rs, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
Is is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRE110 relay. However, the actual fault
setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say that the
actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the sum of the
relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current of all the
parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is normally small
enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS ≦ IP / N – 4Imag
where:
IS = setting applied to GRE110 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
More sensitive settings for Is allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
require larger values of Rs to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential circuit
can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk, developed
may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2× 2 × Vk × (I F R S − Vk )
where:
 28 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Vk = CT knee point voltage

IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CIβ
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
β = constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point voltage
Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk ≧ 2×VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
Diretctional Sensitive Earth fault protection (at model 820 and 821)
The models 820 and 821 are espetialy models for the directional sensitive earth fault protection
using earth fault current and zero phase voltage at the non- grounding system,.
Figure 2.3.5 illustrates the directional characteristic, with the forward operate zone shaded. The
reverse zone is simply a mirror image of the forward zone. The forward operate zone or reverse
operate zone is selectable by the scheme switch [SE-DIR] As shown in Figure 2.3.6, the directional
characteristic is composed of a forward directional characteristic, reverse directional characteristic
and overcurrent thresholds.
Polarising signals for directional elements are shown in Figure 2.3.7. Polarisation for directional
sensitive earth fault element SEF is derived from a residual voltage.
Figures 2.3.8 to 2.3.11 show the scheme logic for the directional sensitive earth fault protection.
The directional control characteristic can be selected to “FWD” or “REV” or “Non” by scheme
switch setting [SE∗-DIR].
At the model 820 and 821, the directional sensitive earth fault elements can be configured for
directional operation in the same way as the standard earth fault pole, by polarising against the
residual voltage. An additional restraint on operation can be provided by a Zero phase sequence
Power element ZP, for use in protection of power systems which utilise resonant (Petersen coil)
earthing methods.
 29 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Boundary of Operation
CA + 90 +87.5 ° (leading)
CA + 60
CA + 30
10 x Is
CA 180 5 x Is
- CA
Reverse Forward
Operate Operate
CA - 30
Zone Zone
CA - 60
CA: Characteristic CA - 90 Boundary of Operation
angle
- 87.5° (lagging)
Figure 2.3.5 Directional Operate SEF Characteristic
Directional (Forward)
& ∗∗1-4
Forward
Directional (Reverse)
& ∗∗1-4
Reverse
Overcurrent (1-4 stage)
(Note) NOC provides stage 1 and 2 only.
Figure 2.3.6 Directional element
−Ve
Ie
Ve
Figure 2.3.7 Relationship Polarising signal
 30 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
67 TSE1
SEF1 t 0
≥1 &
& 0.00 - 300.00s ≥1 121
SEF1-S1
[SE1-2F] _TRIP
[SE1EN]
+ "Block" +
& "ON" &
ICD
SEF1 97
INST TS1S2
[SE1S2] t 0 122
& SEF1-S2_
[MSE1] +
"ON" 0.00 - 300.00s TRIP
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
SEF1HS SEF1 HS
"US"
"C"
"D"
ZPF & ≥1 &

≥1
ZPR
& ≥1 &
"ON"
[ZPEN]
"OFF"
+
"FWD"
[SE1 DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
Figure 2.3.8 SEF1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Scheme Logic for models 820 and 821
68 TSE2
SEF2 t 0
≥1 &
& 0.00 - 300.00s ≥1 123
SEF2
[SE2-2F] _TRIP
[SE2EN]
+ "Block" +
& "ON" &
ICD
SEF2 157
INST
[MSE2]
+
"IEC"
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
"D"
ZPF & ≥1 &

≥1
ZPR
& ≥1 &
"ON"
[ZPEN]
"OFF"
+
"FWD"
[SE2DIR] "REV"
"NON"
+
 31 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
69 TSE3
SEF3 & t 0
124
≥1 SEF3 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE3-2F]
[SE3EN]
+ "Block" +
& "ON" &
ICD
SEF3
INST
ZPF
& ≥1 &
ZPR ≥1
& ≥1 &
"ON"
[ZPEN]
"OFF"
+
"FWD"
[SE3 DIR]
"REV"
"NON"
+
70 TSE4
SEF4 & t 0
125
≥1 SEF4_ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
[SE4EN]
+ "Block" +
& "ON" &
ICD
SEF4
INST
ZPF
& ≥1 &
ZPR ≥1
& ≥1 &
"ON"
[ZPEN]
"OFF"
+
"FWD"
[SE4 DIR]
"REV"
"NON"
+
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection for
models 820 and 821 and their setting ranges.
SEFCT 1 - 20000 1 150 CT ratio for SEFCT
SEθ −95° – 95° 1° 0° SEF characteristic angle
SEV 0.5 – 100.0 0.1 V 3.0V SEF ZPS voltage level
TSE1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] = D.
TSE1M 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE1] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE1] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
 32 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

TSE1S2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
TSE2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF2 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE2] = D.
TSE2M 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting.
Required if [MSE2] = IEC, IEEE or US.
TSE2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MSE2] = IEC or [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF3 definite time setting.
TSE4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF4 definite time setting.
ZP 0.00 – 25.00 W 0.01 W 0.00 W Zero phase sequence power sensitivity
[SE1-DIR] FWD / REV / NON FWD SEF1 directional characteristic
[MSE1] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D SEF1 characteristic
[SE1S2] Off / On Off SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[VTF-SE1BLK] Off / On Off VTF block enable
[SE2-DIR] FWD / REV /NON FWD SEF2 directional characteristic
[MSE2] D/IEC/IEEE/US/C D SEF2 characteristic
[ZPEN] Off / On Off Zero phase sequence power block enable
 33 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection

The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load,
typically motor load.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. However,
operation is blocked when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to discriminate the
loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection.
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements are
programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is three-
phase only.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.1 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
Two undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output trip and alarm signals UC1 TRIP and UC2
ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
Those protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or binary input
signal UC BLOCK.
TUC1
71
A t 0 127
& UC1-A TRIP
72
UC1 B
73
C t 0 128
& UC1-B TRIP
t 0 129
[UC1EN] & UC1-C TRIP
+ 126
0.00 - 300.00s
"ON" ≥1 UC1 TRIP
TUC2
74
A t 0 131
& UC2-A ALARM
75
UC2 B
76
C t 0 132
& UC2-B ALARM
t 0 133
[UC2EN] & UC2-C ALARM
+ 0.00 - 300.00s 130
"ON" ≥1 UC2 ALARM
UC BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.1 Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
 34 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

UC1 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.40 A UC1 threshold setting
TUC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC1 definite time setting
UC2 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.20 A UC2 threshold setting
TUC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC2 definite time setting
[UC1EN] Off / On Off UC1 Enable
[UC2EN] Off / On Off UC2 Enable
 35 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection

The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRE110 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained overloading.
The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  −t 
θ =  1 − e τ × 100%
 (1)
I 2AOL  
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is the
point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay
gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior to
the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for ‘cold’
and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case for the hot curve where prior load current Ip is zero,
catering to the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (2)
 I − I AOL 
 I2 − I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (3)
 I − I AOL 
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.5.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand
chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously un-loaded
system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched onto a system
 36 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -

prior load) 90% prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)

10
Operate Time (minutes)
10
1
τ
τ
1 100
0.1
50 50
20 20
10
0.1 10 0.01 5
5 2
2 1
0.001
0.01 1
1 10
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL) Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.5.1 Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.2 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM ALARM and trip signal THM TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMTEN]
respectively or binary input signal THM BLOCK.
77
A & THM ALARM
THM
78
T & THM TRIP
[THMAEN]
+
"ON"
[THMEN]
+
"ON"
THM BLOCK 1
Figure 2.5.2 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
 37 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and their
setting ranges.
THM 0.50 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 1.00 A Thermal overload setting.
(THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP 0.0 – 5.0 A 0.01 A 0.00 A Prior load setting.
TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 min 0.1 min 10.0 min Thermal time constant
THMA 50 – 99 % 1% 80 % Thermal alarm setting.
(Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMEN] Off / On Off Thermal OL enable
[THMAEN] Off / On Off Thermal alarm enable
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element,
and is typically used when testing the element. For the majority of applications, THMIP
should be set to its default value of zero, in which case the previous load current, Ip, is
calculated internally by the thermal model, providing memory of conditions occurring
before an overload.
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection

The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NPS) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions. This function is NOT for models 820 and 821.
Phase overcurrent protection is forced to be set to lower sensitivity when the load current is large
but NPS sensitivity is not affected by magnitude of the load current, except in the case of erroneous
negative sequence current due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution lines.
For some earth faults, only a limited amount of zero sequence current is fed while the negative
sequence current is comparatively larger. This is probable when the fault occurs at the remote end
with a small reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the
remote end.
In these cases, NSP backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The NPS
also protects the rotor of a rotating machine from over-heating by detecting a load unbalance.
Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to a phase loss can lead to increases in the
negative sequence current and in machine over-heating.
Two independent negative sequence overcurrent elements are provided for tripping and alarming.
The elements are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.6.1 shows the scheme logic of the NSP. Two negative sequence overcurrent elements
NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signal NPS1 TRIP and alarm signal
NPS2 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
 38 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
transformer energisation, and can block the NPS1 and NPS2 elements by the scheme switches
[NPS1-2F] and [NPS2-2F] respectively. See section 2.9.
79 TNPS1
NPS1 t 0 136
& NPS1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NPS1-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[NPS1EN]
+
"ON"
80 TNPS2
137
NPS2 t 0
& NPS2 ALARM
0.00 - 300.00s
[NPS2-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[NPS2EN]
+
"ON"
NPS BLOCK 1
Figure 2.6.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Scheme Logic
The tripping and alarming can be disabled by scheme switches [NPS1], [NPS2] or binary input
signal NPS BLOCK.
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NSOP protection and their setting
ranges.
NPS1 0.10 -10.0 A 0.01 A 0.40 A NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
NPS2 0.10 -10.0 A 0.01 A 0.20 A NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NPS1 definite time setting
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NPS2 definite time setting
[NPS1EN] Off / On Off NPS1 Enable
[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable
Sensitive setting of NPS1 and NPS2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the relay
continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the maximum
value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set NPS1 and
NPS2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring elements
NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is around 200ms.
 39 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection

Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear. This function is NOT for models 820 and 821.
Figure 2.7.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
E1A
Single-phase series fault
E1B
k1 1– k1
k 1Z1 I1F I1F (1-k1)Z1
E1A E1B
Positive phase sequence

k 2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative phase sequence

k 0Z0 I0F I0F (1-k0)Z0
Zero phase sequence
I1F k 2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 I1F

k 1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F
Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A E1B
Figure 2.7.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
 40 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at the fault location in a single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0 (1)

Z2FI2F − Z0FI0F = 0 (2)
E1A − E1B = Z1FI1F − Z2FI2F (3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z2 + Z0
I1F = (E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
−Z0
I2F = (E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
E
−Z2
I0F = (E − E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of negative
to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given with negative and zero sequence
impedance of the system:
I2F |I2F| Z0
= =
I1F |I1F| Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of BCD element is shown in Figure 2.7.2 to obtain the stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1| ≥ BCD
setting & BCD
|I1| ≥ 0.04
|I2| ≥ 0.01
0.01
0 I1
0.04
Figure 2.7.2 BCD Element Characteristic
 41 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.7.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs trip
signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], binary input signal BCD BLOCK.
The broken conductor protection is enabled when three-phase current is introduced.
transforomer energisation, and can block the BCD element by scheme switch [BCD-2F]. See
Section 2.9.
81 TBCD
138
BCD t 0
& BCD TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[BCD-2F]
+ “Block”
&
ICD
[BCDEN]
+
"ON"
BCD BLOCK 1
Figure 2.7.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and their
setting ranges.
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 0.01 0.20 I2 / I1
TBCD 0.00 – 300.00s 0.01s 0.00 s BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN] Off / On Off BCD Enable
[BCD-2F] NA / Block NA BCD blocked by inrush current
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current normally
present on the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay continuously and
displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the maximum value of the last
15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage. The BCD
setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
 42 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection

When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element provided for each phase.
For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than 20ms) is
used. The element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value.
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original breaker.
To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original breaker
again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the adjacent breakers
following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use retripping at all, or
use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping with trip command plus
overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also operate
correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
The BFP is performed on per-phase basis. Figure 2.8.1 shows the scheme logic for the BFP. The
BFP is started by per-phase base trip signals EXT TRIP-A to -C or three-phase base trip signal
EXT TRIP3PH of the external line protection or an internal trip signal CBF INIT. These trip
signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after initiation.
Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with the scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes of the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode in
which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which retrip
is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the scheme
switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is the trip
mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.8.2 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should include
that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and the
BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
 43 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
[BTC]
+ TBTC
82 "ON" 187
A t 0
& 140
83 ≥1 CBF TRIP
CBF B 188
84 t 0
C &
189
t 0
&
0.00 - 300.00s
TRTC
t 0
& 139
≥1 ≥1 CBF RETRIP
t 0
& ≥1
t 0
& ≥1
0.00 - 300.00s
EXT TRIP-APH
≥1 &
EXT TRIP-BPH ≥1 &
EXT TRIP-CPH
≥1 &
EXT TRIP3PH [RTC]

+
"OC"
CBF INIT
"DIR"
Figure 2.8.1 Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic
Fault Start CBFP

Trip
Adjacent
breakers Closed Open
TRIP
Normal trip Retrip

Original
breakers Closed Open Open
Tcb Tcb
OCBF
Toc Toc
TRTC
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBTC
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.8.2 Sequence Diagram
 44 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
CBF 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.05 A 0.50 A Overcurrent setting
TRTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Retrip time setting
TBTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Back trip time setting
[RTC] Off / DIR / OC Off Retrip control
[BTC] Off / On Off Back trip control
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200% of
the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit breaker
(Tcb in Figure 2.8.2) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.8.2). The timer
setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TRTC + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
The actual tripping time after BFP start will be added the time (approx. 15 to 20ms) consumed by
motion of binary input and output to above timer’s settings. (Response time of binary inputs: less
than 8ms, Operating time of binary outputs: less than 10ms)
 45 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush

GRE110 provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a magnetising
inrush current during transformer energisation.
- Protection block by inrush current detector
- Cold load protection
2.9.1 Inrush Current Detector
Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
- OC1 to OC4
- EF1 to EF4
- SEF1 to SEF4
- NPS1 and NPS2
- BCD
The blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC∗-2F], [EF∗-2F],
[SEF∗-2F], [NPS∗-2F] and [BCD-2F].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between second harmonic current I2f and fundamental current I1f
in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure 2.9.1 shows the
characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.9.2 shows the ICD block scheme. When ICD
operates, OC, EF, SEF, NPS and BCD elements are blocked independently. The scheme logic of
each element is shown in the previous sections.
I2f/I1f
|I2f|/|I1f|≥ICD-2f(%) & ICD
|I1f|≥ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0 ICDOC I1f
Figure 2.9.1 ICD Element Characteristic
261
A
262 ≥1 ICD
ICD
B
263
C
Figure 2.9.2 ICD Block Scheme

Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
ICD-2f 10 – 50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection
ICDOC 1.00 – 25.0 A 0.01 A 1.00 A ICD threshold setting
 46 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.9.2 Cold Load Protection

The cold load function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after energising the
system. This feature is used to prevent unwanted protection operation when closing on to the type of
load which takes a high level of current for a period after energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a moment
when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5 times
normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate the
inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
This function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after closing on to the type of
load that takes a high level of load on energisation. This is achieved by a ‘Cold Load Settings
Group’, in which the user can use alternative settings of measuring elements in other setting group.
Normally the user will choose higher current settings and/or longer time delays and/or disable
elements altogether within this group. The ‘Cold Load Settings’ can be set in any of the four setting
groups provided for protection and the group is specified by the scheme switch [CLSG] setting.
2.9.2.1 Scheme Logic

A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.9.3 and Figure 2.9.4 for the
cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs, one each for CB
OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is in
STATE 0, and the normal default settings group is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE 2,
and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, the ‘Cold Load Settings Group’ is applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLSG] to “Off”.
 47 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings: Normal
Run T CLE timer

I L<ICLDO for
Monitor CB status T CLR timer T CLDO time
expires
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
STATE 2 CB closes CB status: Closed
CB status: Open Settings: Cold Load
Settings: Cold Load
Run T CLR timer
Monitor CB status CB opens Monitor CB status
within Monitor load current IL
CLR time
Figure 2.9.3 State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
Change to
146 & STATE 1
STATE 0
TCLE
t 0 Change to
147 & ≥1 STATE 2
STATE 1
0 - 10000s
& Change to
≥1 STATE 0
148
STATE 2 Change to
&
STATE 3
149 &
STATE 3
TCLR
t 0
&
0 - 10000s TCLDO
t 0
85 &
A
86 ≥1 1 0.00 - 100.00s
ICLDO B
87
C
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.9.4 Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection
 48 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as follows:
ICLDO 0.10 – 10.0 A 0.01 A 0.50 A Cold load drop-off threshold setting
TCLE 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load enable timer
TCLR 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load reset timer
TCLDO 0.00-100.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s Cold load drop-off timer
[CLSG] Off / 1 / 2 Off Cold load setting group
[CLDOEN] Off / On Off Cold load drop-off enable
These settings are required for all setting groups and the same settings must be entered for the setting
elements above.
2.10 Trip Signal Output

As shown in Figure 2.10.1, all the trip signals are introduced into one of the seven user configurable
binary output circuits. One tripping output relay with a pair of normally open and closed contacts
is provided to trip the local circuit breaker. If the breaker failure protection is applied, the back-trip
signal CBF TRIP is introduced into another binary output circuit to trip adjacent circuit breakers,
as shown in Figure 2.10.2.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be set with the scheme switch [Reset] to “instantaneous(Ins)”, “delayed(Dl)”, “dwell(Dw)” or
“latched(Lat)”. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by TBO.
The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it is reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input
signal REMOTE RESET. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
When instantaneous reset of the tripping output relay is selected, it must be checked that the
tripping circuit is opened with a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit breaker
tripping coil current.
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the trip signal output and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Ins / Dl / Dw / Lat Ins Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
dwell, delayed or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s 0.20s
 49 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OC1 TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC3 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP ≥1 CBF INIT
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF1-S2 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP
NPS1 TRIP 141
BCD TRIP ≥1
CBF RETRIP
GENERAL TRIP
Binary output circuit
&
≥1 ≥1 BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Ins"
0 t
&
"Dw"
+ 0.00 – 10.00s Tripping output relay
"Dl"
& S
"Lat" F/F
R
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.1 Tripping Output for Local Circuit Breaker
 50 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CBF TRIP
&
≥1 ≥1 BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Ins"
0 t
&
"Dw"
+ 0.00 – 10.00s Tripping output relay
"Dl"
& S
"Lat" F/F
R
Reset button
+
≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.2 Tripping Output for Adjacent Circuit Breakers
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits

All GRE110 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection

Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault clearance
times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a blocked
overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly reduce fault
clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where substations
are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.11.1 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1 HS, and EF1 HS of OC1 and EF1
elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking signal. OC2 and
EF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer to Figure 2.1.5 and
2.1.6.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The signal
is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK and EF2 BLOCK at the receiving end, and blocks the
OC2 and EF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are recommended for the OC2 and
EF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time to arrive before protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the scheme switch
[MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a failure of the blocked scheme.
 51 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Trip
GRE110 GRE110 GRE110
OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2
OC1HS / OC1HS /
High EF1HS High EF1HS
Speed Speed
Block Block
Figure 2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection

GRE110 can be applied to provide a busbar zone scheme for a simple radial system where a
substation has only one source, as illustrated in Figure 2.11.2.
For a fault on an outgoing feeder F1, the feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking signal to
inhibit operation of the incomer, the signal OC1 HS and EF1 HS being generated by the
instantaneous phase fault, and earth fault pick-up outputs of OC1 and EF1 allocated to any of the
binary output relays. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped by the OC1 and EF1 elements, programmed
with inverse time or definite time delays and set to grade with downstream protections.
The incomer protection is programmed to trip via its instantaneous elements OC2 and EF2 set with
short definite time delay settings (minimum 50ms), thus providing rapid isolation for faults in the
busbar zone F2.
At the incomer, inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the
scheme switch [MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of failure of the
blocked scheme.
GRE110 integrated circuit breaker failure protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the first trip failing to clear the earth fault.
In the case of more complex systems where the substation has two incomers, or where power can
flow into the substation from the feeders, then directional protection must be applied (refer to
GRE140 directional overcurrent protection).
 52 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GRE110
GRD110
OC1 / EF1 Delayed Back-up Trip
(inverse time)
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault
OC2 / EF2
Fast Trip
F2
Feeder Trip Feeder Trip Feeder Trip
GRD110
GRE110 GRE110
GRD110 GRD110
GRE110
OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2

OC1 HS / OC1 HS / OC1 HS /
EF1 HS EF1 HS EF1 HS
F1
Figure 2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
2.12 CT Requirements
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection

Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.
5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy Overcurrent Maximum Burden

Limit (%) Factor (at rated current)
Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high and
accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively low, or
where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CT’s own
secondary resistance into account. GRE110 has an extremely low AC current burden, typically less
than 0.03VA for a 5A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied. Relay burden
does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10Ω. If
 53 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5Ω is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage

An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage, according
to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk ≥ If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the maximum
fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the settings to be
applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further, care should be
taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect the CTs (E.g.
residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection

High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk ≥ 2× Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
 54 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2.13 Autoreclose
The GRE110 series provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme for single circuit
breaker application:
• A three phase autoreclosing scheme is used for all shots
• Autoreclosing counter
Autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1 to SEF4 trip signals or
external trip signals via binary inputs, as determined by scheme switches [∗∗∗∗-INIT]. Trip signals
are selected for ARC used/not used, by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] to “On” or “NA” respectively. If a trip
signal is used to block ARC, then [∗∗∗∗-INIT] is set to “BLK”. ARC can also be blocked by using
programmable binary inputs ARCBLK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is single-phase
or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots, from one to five.
In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase tripping and
reclosing.
To disable the autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
The GRE110 also provides a manual close function. A manual close can be performed via
programmable binary inputs ARCMCL.
2.13.1 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.13.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing can be activated by the PLC signal ARC_INIT, etc.
Auto-reclose conditions such as voltage and synchronism check VCHK, etc., can be provided by
PLC signals ARC-S∗_COND.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained using a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclosing is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to "On",
the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed, the
reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC∗-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose has been performed, but tripping occurs again. The second shot autoreclose is
performed after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, the outputs of the step
counter are: SP1 = 1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
If the three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the
 55 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
above tripping occurs. At this time, dead time counter TD3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is
performed after the period of time set on TD3 has elapsed. At this time, the outputs of the step
counter are: SP1 = 0, SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then complete, and tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault"
becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for tripping
that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three shot
autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, a final trip is performed and autoreclose is blocked.
• Reclosing block signal is applied.
• During the reclaim time
• Auto-reclose conditions by PLC signals ARC-S*_COND have not been met.
In the OC∗, EF∗ and SE∗ protections, each tripping is selected by setting [OC∗-TP∗], [EF∗-TP∗]
or [SE∗-TP∗] to any one of “Inst”(instantaneous trip), “Set”(delayed trip by T∗∗∗ and [M∗∗∗]
setting) or “Off”(blocked).
TRDY TD1 STEP COUNTER

t 0 S S t 0 SP1
ARC READY & & CLK SP2
F/F & F/F &
0.0-600.0s R SP1 0.01-300.00s SP3
[ARCEN] R
ARC-SHOT1 SP4
+ ARC-SHOT1 SP5
"ON"
ARC REQ ARC_R ARC-SHOT2
ARC INIT (Trip command) TP1 ≥1 TW 213
≥1 "ON" & TR1 ARC-SHOT3 ≥1
EXT TRIP [ARCREQ] t 0 ARC-SHOT
+
"OFF" ARC-FT ARC-SHOT4 ≥1
0.01-10.00s
0.01-310.00s
Autoreclose initiation ARC-SHOT5
TD2
& S t 0
F/F &
SP2 R 0.01-300.00s
TR2 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT2 t 0
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
TD3
& S t 0
F/F &
SP3 R 0.01-300.00s
TR3 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT3 t 0
ARC-FT
≥1 0.01-310.00s
TD4
ARC-SUCCESS t 0
& S
ARC FAIL F/F &
SP4 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-FT
TR4 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT4 t 0
Reset TRSET ARC-FT
t 0 0.01-310.00s
CB CLOSE & ≥1 TD5
0.01-300.00s
& S t 0
TARCP F/F &
t 0 & 0.01-300.00s
SP5 R
TR5 ARC_R
0.1-300.0s
ARC-SHOT5 t 0
ARC-FT
TRCOV 0.01-310.00s
0 t
1
&
0.1-600.0s
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic
 56 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Autoreclose initiation
Programmable binary input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition) is alive and Reclaim time TRDY
has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is ready. The
reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to “0.0-600.0s”.
ARC INIT(Autoreclose initiation) can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose initiation
is active or not is selected by setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT].
- OC1 to OC4 trip
- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT TRIP(External autoreclose initiation) is an autoreclose initiation via programmable binary
inputs. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
PLC default setting TRDY 211
t 0
CONST 1 302 ARC_READY ARC initiation
& &
0.0-600.0s
[ARCEN]
+
"ON"
EXT_TRIP-A TP1
≥1 & ≥1 ≥1 &
1 1 cycle
EXT_TRIP-B
≥1 & ≥1
EXT_TRIP-C
≥1 & ≥1
EXT_TRIP
∗∗∗-INIT = “ON”
301 ARC_INIT
ARC_NO_ACT RS-ARCBLK
210
ARC_BLK_OR
&
≥1
&
ON &
[EXT-INIT]
BLK
+
∗∗∗-INIT = “BLK”
ARC_BLOCK
Figure 2.13.2 Autoreclose Initiation
Autoreclose shot output (ARC-SHOT)

The maximum number of autoreclosing shots is selected by setting [ARC-NUM].
Setting [ARC-NUM] = S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
The passage of TD∗ time(Dead timer) is selected for each shot number by setting [TD∗] to
“0.01-300.00s.”
The command output pulse(One shot) time is selected by setting [TW] to “0.01-10.00s.”
 57 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TD1
& S t 0 ARC-SHOT1
&
ARC- F/F ARC-SHOT2 ≥1
S1 R 0.01-300.00s TW
PLC default setting
ARC-SHOT3
ARC-SHOT
ARC-SHOT1 CONST1 303 ARC-S1_COND ARC-SHOT4
0.01-10.00s
TD2 ARC-SHOT5
& S t 0
&
F/F
S2 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT2 CONST1 304 ARC-S2_COND

TD3
& S t 0
&
F/F
S3 R 0.01-300.00s
CONST1 305 ARC-S3_COND
ARC-SHOT3
TD4
& S t 0
&
F/F
S4 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT4
TD5
& S 0
&
F/F
S5 R 0.01-300.00s

ARC-SHOT5
Figure 2.13.3 Autoreclosing requirement
Autoreclose success judgement (ARC-SUCCESS)

If a re-trip does not occur within a set period of time after output of the autoreclosing shot, it is
judged to be an Autoreclose success(ARC-SUCCESS).
The period of time is selected by setting [TSUC] to “0.1-600.0s”.
Final trip judgement (ARC-FT)

The following cases are judged ARC-FT(Final Trip) and autoreclose is reset without autoreclose
output.
• Autoreclose initiation when autoreclose initiation is not ready
• Autoreclose initiation after output of the final shot for the setting applied in the multi-shot
mode
• Autorecloce block signal
- Autoreclose block signal by programmable BI
- OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF 4 trip of setting autoreclose block are active.
Setting [∗∗∗∗-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
• PLC signal ARC-S∗_COND is not completed. FT is performed after Timer [TR*].
Reset
If the CB CLOSE(CB close condition) signal is alive and the the CB is closed within a period of
time after an autoreclose initiation, the autoreclose is forcibly reset.
The period of time is selected by setting [TRSET] to “0.01-300.00s”.
It is assumed that the CB is not open(=CBF), in spite of the trip output(=autoreclose initiation).
 58 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RS-ARCBLK & ≥1 ARC_RESET

TRSET
CB CLOSE t 0
&
0.01-300.00s
ARC_IN-PROG
Figure 2.13.4 Reset
Manual close function (MANUAL CLOSE)

MANUAL CLOSE enables the CB to be closed via a PLC signal input.
Autoreclose initiation is not active within a set period of time after a manual close command output.
The period of time is selected by setting [TARCP] to “0.1-600.0s”.
In the case of final trip judgement, a manual close command output is blocked within a set period of
time. The period of time is selected by setting [TRCOV] to “0.1-600.0s”.
ARC-FT
TARCP
t 0
0.1-600.0s
TRCOV
0 t 1 &
0.1-600.0s
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.5 Manual input function
2.13.3 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.
TRDY 0.0 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Reclaim time
TD1 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 1st shot dead time for Stage 1
TR1 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 1st shot reset time for Stage 1
TD2 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 2nd shot dead time for Stage 1
TR2 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 2nd shot reset time for Stage 1
TD3 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 3rd shot dead time for Stage 1
TR3 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 3rd shot reset time for Stage 1
TD4 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 4th shot dead time for Stage 1
TR4 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 4th shot reset time for Stage 1
TD5 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 5th shot dead time for Stage 1
TR5 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 5th shot reset time for Stage 1
TW 0.01 – 10.00 s 0.01 s 2.00 s Output pulse time
TSUC 0.0 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Autoreclose succeed judgement time
TRCOV 0.1 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
TARCP 0.1 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
TRSET 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 3.00 s Autoreclose reset time
[ARCEN] Off/On Off Autoreclose enable
 59 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

[ARC-NUM] S1/S2/S3/S4/S5 S1 Autoreclosing shot number
[OC1-INIT] NA/A1/A2/BLK NA Autoreclose initiation by OC1
[OC1-TP1] OFF/INST/SET SET OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
[OC1-TP2] OFF/INST/SET SET OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
[OC1-TP3] OFF/INST/SET SET OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
[OC1-TP4] OFF/INST/SET SET OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
[EF1-INIT] NA/A1/A2/BLK NA Autoreclose initiation by EF1
[EF1-TP1] OFF/INST/SET SET EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
[EF1-TP2] OFF/INST/SET SET EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
[EF1-TP3] OFF/INST/SET SET EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
[EF1-TP4] OFF/INST/SET SET EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
 60 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

[SE1-INIT] NA/A1/A2/BLK NA Autoreclose initiation by SE1
[SE1-TP1] OFF/INST/SET SET SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
[SE1-TP2] OFF/INST/SET SET SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
[SE1-TP3] OFF/INST/SET SET SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
[SE1-TP4] OFF/INST/SET SET SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
[EXT-INIT] NA/A1/A2/BLK NA Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict one
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required for a higher line voltage or larger fault current.
For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.
 61 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Front Panel

The case outline of GRE110 is shown in Appendix F.
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the Human Machine Interface (HMI) panel has a liquid crystal display
(LCD), light emitting diodes (LED), operation keys and a USB typeB connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 8 rows (128x64dots) with a back-light and displays recording,
status and setting data.
There are a total of 14 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED Red/Green/ Lit when CB is closed.
Yellow
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
LOCAL Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
REMOTE Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) Red/Green/ User-configurable
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
LED1-6 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be programmed for OR
gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, and the LED color can be changed to one
of three colors- (Red / Green / Yellow), the individual statuses of which can be viewed on the LCD
 62 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
screen as “Virtual LEDs.” For setting, see Section 4.2.6.10. For operation, see Section 4.2.1. The
TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by the user, either
by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] as to whether or not it is energised by the output of an
alarm element such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The CB CLOSED and CB OPEN LEDs indicate CB condition. The CB CLOSED LED color can
be changed to one of three colors-(Red / Green / Yellow) .The LOCAL / REMOTE LED indicates
CB control hierarchy. When the LOCAL LED is lit , CB can be controlled by ○ and ｜ keys
on front panel. When the REMOTE LED lit , CB can be controlled by binary input signal or
communication. When neither of these LEDs is lit , the CB control function is disable.
The ▼ key starts the Digest screen (Metering, Virtual LED) indication on LCD. The ▼ key
makes screen change “Virtual LED” → “Metering” →”Indication and back-light off” when the
LCD is on the Digest screen.
The ENTER key starts the Main menu indication on LCD.
The END key clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light when the LCD is on
the “MAIN MENU”.
The operation keys are used to display the records, status and setting data on the LCD, to input
settings or to change settings.
The USB connector is a B-type connector. This connector is used for connection with a local
personal computer.
Liquid crystal
display
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Light emitting
diodes (LED)
Control keys
Operation keys
To a local PC
USB type B connector

Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel (model 400 / 420 / 401 / 421 / 820 / 821 )
 63 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.2 Input and Output Signals
3.2.1 AC Input Signals

Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRE110 model and their respective input
terminal numbers.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals
(a) model 400 / 401 / 420 / 421 / 820 /821
Term. No. Model

of TB1 400 / 401 420 / 421 820 / 821
1-2 A phase current A phase current A phase current
3-4 B phase current B phase current C phase current
5-6 C phase current C phase current Zero phase voltage
Residual current (E) Zero sequence Zero sequence

7-8 current (SE) current (SE)
(b) model 402 / 422
Term. No. Model

of TB2 402 422
1-2 A phase current A phase current
3-4 B phase current B phase current
5-6 C phase current C phase current
Residual current (E) Zero sequence

7-8 current (SE)
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals

The GRE110 provides 2 (Model 400/420/820) or 6 (Model 401/421/402/422/821) programmable
binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is programmable, and provided with the function of
Logic level inversion , detection threshold voltage change and Function selection.
Logic level inversion and detection threshold voltage change

The binary input circuit of the GRE110 is provided with a logic level inversion function, a pick-up
and drop-off delay timer function and a detection threshold voltage change as shown in Figure
3.2.1. Each input circuit has a binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or
inverted operation. This allows the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed
contacts. Where the driving contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to
“Norm” (normal). If not, then “Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay
times can be set 0.0 to 300.00s respectively.
The binary input detection nominal voltage is programmable by the user, and the setting range
varies depending on the rated DC power supply voltage. In the case that a 110V / 220Vdc rated
model is ordered, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 48V, 110V or 220V for BI1 and
 64 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
BI2, and to 110V or 220V for BI3-BI6. In the case of a 24 / 48Vdc model, the input detection
nominal voltage can be set to 12V, 24V or 48V for BI1 and BI2, and to 24V or 48V for BI3-BI6.
In the case of a 48 / 110Vdc model, the input detection nominal voltage can be set to 24V, 48V or
110V for BI1 and BI2, and to 48V or 110V for BI3-BI6.
The binary input detection threshold voltage (i.e. minimum operating voltage) is normally set at
77V and 154V for supply voltages of 110V and 220V respectively. In case of 24V and 48V
supplies, the normal thresholds are 16.8V and 33.6V respectively. Binary inputs can be configured
for operation in a Trip Circuit Supervision (TCS) scheme by setting the [TCSPEN] switch to
“Enable”. In case TCS using 2 binary inputs is to be applied (refer to Section 3.3.3), then the binary
input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc supply
voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS – BI6SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BITHR1 * BI1-2 threshold Voltage 48 / 110 / 220 110
(12 / 24 / 48 ) (24)
(24 / 48 / 110 ) (48)
BITHR2 * BI3-6 threshold voltage 110 / 220 110
(24 / 48) (24)
(48 / 110) (110)
TCSPEN TCS enable Off / On / Opt-On Off
BI1PUD – BI6PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD – BI6DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
*At the PC interface software RSM100 (Relay Setting and Monitoring system), BI threshold voltage
settings are indicated by V1, V2 and V3. The V1, V2 and V3 are distinguished with 11th digit of
ordering code for supply voltage, as shown below,:
Supply voltage (11th digt of ordering cord) V1 V2 V3
110 - 220V (-1x-xx) BITH1 48V 110V 220
BITH2 110V 220V -
48 - 110V (-2x-xx) BITH1 24V 48V 110V
BITH2 48V 110V -
12 - 48V (-Ax-xx) BITH1 12V 24V 48V
BITH2 24V 48V -
The binary input detection threshold of BI1 and BI2 should be set to less than half of the rated dc
supply voltage.
The logic level inversion function, pick-up and drop-off delay timer and detection voltage change
settings are as follow:
 65 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GRE110
(+) (−) BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]
BI1 t 0 0 t
BI1 command
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 t 0 0 t
BI2 command
BI2
"Norm"
[BITHR1]
1
+
"220V" "Inv"
BI3 +
"110V"
+
"48V"
BI6PUD BI6DOD [BI6SNS]
BI6 t 0 0 t
BI6 BI6 command
"Norm"
[BITHR2] 1
+ "Inv"
"220V"
+
"110V"
0V
3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion

Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the
setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic and
LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
[OC1BLK]
BI1 COMMAND OC1 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC2BLK]
OC2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC3BLK]
OC3 BLOCK
"ON"
[Alarm4]
Alarm 4
"ON"
Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI6 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as
shown in Figure 3.2.2.
 66 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals

Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition
OC1 protection block OC1 BLOCK / OC1BLK Closed to block
EF1 protection block EF1 BLOCK / EF1BLK Closed to block
SEF1 protection block SEF1 BLOCK / SEF1BLK Closed to block
Undercurrent protection block UC BLOCK / UCBLK Closed to block
Thermal overload protection block THM BLOCK / THMBLK Closed to block
Negative sequence OC block NPS BLOCK / NPSBLK Closed to block
Broken conductor protection BCD BLOCK / BCDBLK Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply
CB open state monitoring CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact closed
CB close state monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally close contact closed
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP3PH / EXT3PH External trip - 3 phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-APH / EXTAPH External trip - A phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-BPH / EXTBPH External trip - B phase
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-CPH / EXTCPH External trip - C phase
Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Synchronize clock SYNC CLOCK / SYNCLK Synchronize clock
Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record
Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
Remote open command REMOTE OPEN / RMTOPN Close to output CB open command.
Remote close command REMOTE CLOSE / RMTCLS Close to output CB close command.
Interlock Control Lock / CNTLCK Close to block CB close command.
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between two settings groups.
 67 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Element Contents Range Step Default

BI1SGS – BI6SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 OFF
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message within 22 characters for each
alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI6 by setting. Then when inputs
associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals

The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix G. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BO1 to BO4
individually or in arbitrary combinations. The output relays BO1 and BO2 connect to CB OPEN /
CLOSE for CB control. The CB closed control switch ｜ is linked directly to BO1 and the CB
open control switch ○ is linked directly to BO2, and all other signals are blocked from output
relay BO1, when control function is enable.
Signals can be combined using either an AND circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in
Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be configured according to the setting menu. Appendix H
shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Ins”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Lat” by the
scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set
by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does not
continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous for
the input signal time.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply circuit
is detected.
Signal List
& 4 GATES Auxiliary relay

Appendix B &
or ≥1
≥1
≥1
4 GATES
&
TBO
0 t
"Ins" &
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl"
& S
F/F
"Lat"
R
Reset button
+ ≥1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
 68 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Ins / Dl / Dw /Lat See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C
3.2.4 PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) Function

GRE110 is provided with a PLC function which enables user-configurable sequence logic based
upon binary signals. The sequence logic with timers, flip-flops, AND, OR, XOR, NOT logic, etc.
can be produced by using the PC software “PLC tool” and linked to signals corresponding to relay
elements or binary circuits.
Configurable binary inputs and the initiation of fault and disturbance records can be programmed
using the PLC function. Temporary signals are provided for complicated logic or for using a
user-configured signal in many logic sequences.
PLC logic is assigned to protection signals by using the PLC tool. For details of the PLC tool, refer
to the PLC tool instruction manual. (see 6F2S0810 Instruction manual – PLC TOOL)
Figure 3.2.4.1 Sample Screen for PLC Tool
3.3 Automatic Supervision
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision

Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRE110 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
• The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
• Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
• When a failure occurs, the user should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.
• Under relay failure detection , CB open control is enabled, but CB close control is disabled.
 69 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health of
the AC input circuit is verified. This monitoring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
• CT circuit current monitoring
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) − 4 × Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) ≥ k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 0.2A
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred in
the AC input circuit. If the imbalance detected, the relay issues an alarm shown in Table 3.3.1.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and that
the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to verify
that memory circuits are healthy:
• Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
• Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
• Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
Power supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level is monitored, and is checked to see that the DC voltage is within a
prescribed range.
Issuing of Alarms
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
• A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring:
less than 1s
• AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
 70 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by either one or two binary inputs, as
described below.
Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by one binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the binary
input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker
open and closed conditions. Then logic signal output of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is "1"
under healthy conditions.
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets and
TC FAIL becomes "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is
output when TC FAIL is "0".
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the
one BI selected "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB
is closed.
GRE110 Circuit Breaker
Trip Output CB Trip Coil -ve Trip

+ve
Trip Supply
Supply
Binary CB Aux.
Input Contacts
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision by 1 binary input
t 0 0 t
TC FAIL TCSV
≥1 1 &
(BI command)
0.4s 0.4s
TC FAIL
(BI command)
CB status “closed”
& ≥1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs

The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by two binary inputs. Figure 3.3.3
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows in photo-couplers,
the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both the breaker open
and closed conditions.
If the trip circuit supply is lost or if a connection becomes open circuit then the TCS issues a Trip
Circuit Fail alarm.
 71 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON" and the two
BIs selected "TCFAIL". When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is
closed. TCS by 2BIs should be applied BI1 and BI2 for BI inputs. The TCS by 2BIs set the BI
threshold voltage ([BITHR1]) as about the half of trip supply voltage. If the trip supply voltage is
110V (or 24V) , [BITHR1] sets "48" (or "12").
GRE110 Circuit Breaker
Trip Output CB Aux. CB Trip Coil -ve Trip

+ve
Contacts Supply
Trip
Supply
Resistor
Binary Input Binary Input

(BI1) (BI2)
Figure 3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision by 2 binary inputs
The resistors connected in series with the binary inputs are to prevent unnecessary tripping of the
circuit breaker if any one component suffers a short-circuit condition. The value of resistance should
be chosen to limit the current flowing through the circuit breaker trip coil to 60mA in the event of a
short circuit of BI1 with the circuit breaker closed. A typical value for a 110V dc rated circuit is
3.3kΩ.
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking the correct condition of the circuit breaker
(CB) in accordance with the position of its auxiliary switches. If two binary inputs are programmed
to the functions ‘CB CONT OPN’(CBOPN) and ‘CB CONT CLS’(CBCLS), then the CB state
monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances these inputs are in opposite states.
Figure 3.3.4 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same state during five seconds, then a CB
state alarm CBSV outputs and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are displayed in LCD message and event
record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
t 0 1271
CB CONT_OPN =1 1 CBSV
&
5.0s
CB CONT_CLS
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.4 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and BIn
respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”. (Refer
to Section 4.2.6.8.)
 72 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of the CB is required for checking the health of the trip circuit, the operation
mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or a
number of fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to assist in determining the
appropriate time for maintenance of the CB:
• The number of trips is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism.
The trip counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued
and informs the user that maintenance is due when the count exceeds a user-defined setting
TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
• Sum of the broken current quantity ∑Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability of
CB. The ∑Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time of
issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of ∑I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current broken by CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time within
the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally set to 2 to
monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially those for HV
systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting ∑IyALM. The ∑Iy count alarm can be enabled or disabled by
setting the scheme switch [∑IyAEN].
• Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB operating
time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is slow. The
operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the phase
currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase exceeds a
user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified interrupting
time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme
switch [OPTAEN].
The maintenance program should comply with the switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
The CB condition monitoring functions are triggered each time a trip is issued, and they can also be
triggered by an external device via binary input EXT TRIP3PH (EXT3PH) or EXT TRIP∗PH
(EXT∗PH) as shown in Figure 3.3.4. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
(+) (−) External trip GRE110 Binary input setting

three-phase [EXT3PH]
BIa command EXT3PH
BIa
"ON"
External trip
A-phase [EXTAPH]
BIb command EXTAPH
BIb
"ON"
Figure 3.3.4 Binary Input Setting for CB Condition Monitoring
3.3.5 Failure Alarms

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision items and
alarms.
 73 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed automatically
when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing ▼ key. The event record messages are shown
on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [A.M.F.] to "OFF". The
setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD LED LED LED Event record Message

Message "IN SERVICE" "ALARM" "Relay fail"
AC input imbalance CT err (2)
Err: CT On/Off (2) On (4)
monitoring Relay fail or Relay fail-A
A/D accuracy check (1) Off On (4) Relay fail

Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
Power supply monitoring Err: DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
CB condition monitoring ALM:TP TP COUNT ALM,
On On Off
Trip count alarm COUNT Relay fail-A
Operating time alarm ALM: OP On On Off OP time ALM, Relay fail-A
time
∑Iy count alarm ALM:∑IY On On Off ∑IY-A ALM, ∑IY-B ALM or
∑IY-C ALM, Relay fail-A
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with " Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM". This monitoring is NOT for models 820 and 821.
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates except for DC supply fail condition.
3.3.6 Trip Blocking

When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long as
the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
• A/D accuracy check
• Memory monitoring
• Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output (ALM&BLK), or
if only an alarm is output (ALM).
 74 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.3.7 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the automatic supervision and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
[SVCNT] ALM&BLK / ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[TCSPEN] OFF/ON/OPT-ON OFF Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] OFF/ON OFF CB state monitoring
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
[∑IyAEN] OFF/ON OFF ∑Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN] OFF/ON OFF Operate time alarm
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
∑IyALM 10 – 10000 E6 E6 10000 ∑Iy alarm threshold setting
YVALUE 1.0 – 2.0 0.1 2.0 y value setting
OPTALM 100 – 5000 ms 10 ms 1000 ms Operate time alarm threshold setting
The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are set
in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
3.4 Recording Function

The GRE110 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording

Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRE110 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Faulted phase
Power system quantities
Up to the 4 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 4 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated.
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme that output the tripping command.
 75 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Faulted phase
This is the phase to which a operating command is output.
Power system quantities
The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
- Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
- Magnitude of zero phase voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM)
The zero sequence current Ie in the model 420, 421 and 422 is calculated from the three phase input
currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is displayed the
current fed from CT.
On the model 820 and 821, the input power system quantities are Ia, Ib, Ise and Ve. Therefore, It
can NOT calculate Ie , I1 , I2 and I2/I1.
Table 3.4.1 Displayed Power System Quantities
Power system quantities Model 400, 401, 402 Model 420, 421, 422 Model 820, 821
Phase current Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ic
Zero sequence current Ie Ie, Ise Ise
Zero phase voltage - - Ve
Positive and negative
I1, I2 I1, I2 -
sequence current
Ratio of Negative to positive
I2 / I1 I2 / I1 -
sequence current
Percentage of thermal
THM THM THM
capacity
3.4.2 Event Recording

The events shown in Appendix C are recorded with the 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI6 command, the user can select the recording items and their status change
mode to initiate recording as below.
One of the following four modes is selectable.Modes Setting
Not to record the event. N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B
For the setting, see the Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 200 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 200 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored. The LCD display only
 76 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
shows 100 records. All event records (200 records) can be displayed on a PC. For how to obtain all
event records on the PC , see the PC software instruction manual.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. The records include maximum four analogue signals (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie), 32 binary
signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in Appendix B
can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time can be set between 0.1 and 4.9s and post-fault recording time can be
set between 0.1 and 4.9s. But the total of pre-fault recording time and post-fault recording time is
5.0s or less. The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The
approximate relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is
shown in Table 3.4.2. (Recording time = pre-fault recording time + post-fault recording time)
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.2s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 3.0s 4.0s 5.0s

50Hz 40 29 19 14 9 7 5
60Hz 40 24 16 12 8 6 5
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown in
the table below.
Time1 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 0.3 Pre-fault recording time
Time2 0.1-4.9 s 0.1 s 3.0 Post-fault recording time
OC 0.10-150.00 A 0.01 A 2.00 A Overcurrent detection
EF 0.05-100.00 A 0.01 A 0.60 A Earth fault detection
SE 0.025-2.500 A 0.001 A 0.200 A Sensitive earth fault detection
NPS 0.10-10.00 A 0.01 A 0.40 A Negative sequence overcurrent detection
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.
[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[BI] OFF/ON ON Start by Binary Input signal
[OC] OFF/ON ON Start by OC operation
[EF] OFF/ON ON Start by EF operation
[SEF] OFF/ON ON Start by SEF operation
[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation
 77 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3.5 Metering Function

The GRE110 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay
front panel or on the local or remote PC.
- Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
- Magnitude of zero phase voltage (Ve)

- Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM)
- Maximum phase current (Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax)
- Maximum zero sequence current (Iemax, Isemax)
- Maximum zero phase voltage (Vemax)

- Maximum negative sequence currents (I2max)
- Maximum ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 max)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side as
determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well. For
the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in 4.2.6.7. In
the case of the maximum value displays above, the measured quantity is averaged over a rolling 15
minute time window, and the maximum recorded average value is shown on the display screen.
The zero sequence current Ie in the model 420 is calculated from the three phase input currents and
the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is displayed the current fed
from CT.
The zero phase voltage Ve input is for model 820 and 821. On model 820 and 821, the B phase
cuurent Ib is calculated from A phase current Ia and C phase current Ic.
3.6 Control Function

The relay is provided with the following control functions:
• CB control
• Interlocking
• Change of CB control hierarchy
The CB control function operates the CB by using the open command key ○ or close command
key ｜ on the front panel of the relay, a BI command from remote state or by using the
communication function.
The interlock function blocks the CB close command using the control lock signal of the BI
command.The change of CB control hierarchy changes the CB control state to Local or Remote.
The Local mode is controled at the front panel of the relay (see chapter 4.2.7). The Remote mode is
controlled by BI command or by a communication function of Modbus (see Appendix M) or IEC
61850 (see Appendix P).
 78 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting and Monitoring) via
the USB port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using communication function.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree of
the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel

As shown in Figure 4 .1.1, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and USB type B connector.
(a) Model 400, 401, 420, 421,820, 821 (b) Model 402, 422
Figure 4.1.1 Front Panel of GRE110 (without cover)
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with an 8-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing ▼ key will display the digest screen and pressing ENTER key will display the main-
menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the END key when viewing the LCD display top of
main-menu. If any display is left for about 5 minutes without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 14 LEDs. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
 79 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Label Color Remarks

IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flashing when the relay is in “Test”
menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Yellow Lit when an alarm command is issued or a relay alarm is detected.
Relay Fail Red Lit when a relay failure is detected.
CB CLOSED R /G / Y Lit when CB is closed.
CB OPEN Green Lit when CB is open.
Local Yellow Lit when Local Control is enabled
Remote Yellow Lit when Remote Control is enabled
(LED1) R/G/Y user-configurable
LED1-6 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.

The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
 ▼, ▲,
▲
▼
, : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical

values and text strings.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off the
display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
RESET key
Pressing RESET key causes the Trip LED to turn off and latched output relays to be released.
Control key
The control keys are used for CB control. When the cursor of the LCD display is not at the CB
control position-(CB close/open , Local / Remote), the Control key do not function.
① ○ : Used for CB open operation. When CB is in the open position, the ○ key does
not function.
 80 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
② ｜ : Used for CB close operation. When CB is in the closed position, the ｜ key
does not function
③ L/R : Used for CB control hierarchy (local / remote) change.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when control function is enable.
USB connector
The USB connector is a B-type connector for connection with a local personal computer.
4.1.2 Communication Ports

The following three interfaces are mounted as communication ports:
• USB port
• RS485 port
• Optional Communication Unit port
USB port
This connector is a standard B-type connector for USB transmission and is mounted on the front
panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting operation and display functions
can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for MODBUS communication or the IEC60870-5-103 communication to
connect between relays and to construct a network communication system.
The RS485 port is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in Figure 4.1.1.
TB2
TB1
RS485 Port
Figure 4.1.2 Location of Communication Port
Optional Fibre or Ethernet LAN port for model 402A and 422A
An optional Ethernet LAN port can be connected to substation automation system via an Ethernet
communication networks using the IEC 61850 protocol. 100Base-TX (T1: RJ-45 connector) for
Ethernet LAN is provided at the rear of the relay, as shown in Figure 4.1.3.
 81 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TB3 TB2 TB1
1 2 1 2
3 4 3 4
5 6
5 6 7 8
7 8 9 10
9 10 11 12
11 12
13 14
　ｆor Optional
Communication Port
Figure 4.1.3 Location of Optional Communication Port
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
Note: LCD screens depend on the relay model and the scheme switch setting. Therefore,
LCD screens described in this section are samples for a typical model.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation
When the GRE110 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is off.
Press the ▼ key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering", "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The
following are the digest screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Metering
I a * * . * * k A
I b * * . * * k A
I c * * . * * k A
I e * * . * * k A
I s e * * . * * * k A
 82 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To clear latched LEDs of Latest fault indications, press RESET key for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C E : Faulted phases.
O C 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED is lit
as well as other configurable LEDs if assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the ▼ to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of the messages.
Press the RESET key for more than 3s to turn off the LEDs; Trip LED and configurable LEDs
(LED1 through LED6) are assigned to latched signal by trigger of tripping.
To return from the menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD when the LCD is displaying the top menu.
• Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision
E r r : R O M , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the "Auto-supervision"
screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the "ALARM" LED
lights.
 83 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs. However, if the failure continues, the "ALARM"
LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the RESET key is available. To return to the digest
"Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
• Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END or CANCEL key.
• Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press the ▼ key to display the digest screens.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
* * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * : A L M 1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by the user. (For
setting, see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the ▼ to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and "Latest fault"
screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
4.2.2 Relay Menu

Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRE110. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
 84 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MENU Record Fault

Event
Disturbance
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Set. (change) Password

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Control Password(Ctrl)
Local / Remote
CB close/open
Test Password(Test)
Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 85 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count and ΣIy count can be displayed or erased.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or Modbus), adjusts a clock
and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate in RSM,
the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs and
configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, description, relay address and
baud rate in Modbus communication, record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary
outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Control
The "Control" menu is used to operate the CB. When the cursor (>) is at Local / Remote position,
the CB control location change over key L/R is enabled. When the cursor (>) is at CB close/open
position, the CB control keys ○ and ｜ are enabled.
Since this is an important menu and is related to relay tripping, it has password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press the ENTER key to display the top "MAIN MENU" screen and then
proceed to the relay menus.
M A I N M E N U
＞ R e c o r d
S t a t u s
S e t . ( v i e w )
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
C o n t r o l
T e s t
To display the "MAIN MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the ▼ key to turn
off the LCD, then press the ENTER key.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer. The
8th line under item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " or " " displayed on the far right
shows that lower or upper lines exist.
 86 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on the
window, use the ▼ and ▲ keys.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T r i p _
> T r i p 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O C 1
O f f / O n
E F 1
O f f / O n
S E F 1
O f f / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in Appendix
E, press the END or CANCEL key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and then
move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records and
counts such as trip count and ΣIy count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
• Open the top "MAIN MENU" screen by pressing ENTER key.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o r d
＞ F a u l t
E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c E
C o u n t e r
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
 87 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 2 F a u l t
＞ V i e w r e c o r d
C l e a r
• Select "View record" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the
top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F a u l t
＞ ♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
• Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the ▲ and ▼ keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/ 4 F a u l t ♯ 1
0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
O C 1
P h a s e A B C E
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
I a * * . * * k A
I b * * . * * k A
I c * * . * * k A
I e * * . * * k A
I s e * * . * * * k A Not available for model 400 series.
I 1 * * . * * k A
I 2 * * . * * k A
I 2 / I 1 * * . * *
F a u l t v a l u e s
I a * * . * * k A
I b * * . * * k A
I c * * . * * k A
 88 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I e * * . * * k A
I s e * * . * * * k A Not available for model 400 series.
I 1 * * . * * k A
I 2 * * . * * k A
I 2 / I 1 * * . * *
T H M * * * . * %
0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 8 . 0 3 1
A R C - S 1
0 1 / J a n / 2 0 1 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 9 . 0 3 1
O C 1 , A R C - F T
To clear all the fault records, do the following:

• Open the "Record" sub-menu.
• Select "Fault" to display the "Fault" screen.
• Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in back-up RAM.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not displayed.
If the metering value exceed the displayable digits, the metering value indicate maximam value and
“*” at the right of unit.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:

• Select "Event" to display the "Event" screen.
/ 2 E v e n t
C l e a r
 89 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "View record" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E v e n t
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 1 0 0
O C 1 ･ A t r i p O n
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 0 9 9
O C 1 ･ A t r i p O N
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 9 8
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 0 0 4
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 0 0 2
2 4 / A ｕ g / 2 0 0 9 0 0 1
▼
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E v e n t
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 0 0
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 1 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 1 1
O C 1 ･ A t r i P O N
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 2 0 0
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 1 1
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 4 . 1 0 0
▲
Press the key to return the screen with date.
To clear all the event records, do the following:
 90 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in back-up RAM.
"Data lost" or "E.record CLR" and "F.record CLR" are displayed at the initial setting.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.

• Select "Disturbance" to display the "Disturbance" screen.
/ 2 D i s t u r b a n c e
C l e a r
• Select "View record" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
♯ 1 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 2 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
♯ 3 0 1 / J a n / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 . 0 0 0
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:
 91 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter


• Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
＞ V i e w c o u n t e r
C l e a r T r i p s
C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
C l e a r Σ I ^ y A
C l e a r Σ I ^ y B
C l e a r Σ I ^ y C
C l e a r A R C s
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
• Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.
/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s * * * * * *
T r i p s A * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s B * * * * * * (*)
T r i p s C * * * * * * (*)
Σ I ^ y A * * * * * * E 6
Σ I ^ y B * * * * * * E 6
Σ I ^ y C * * * * * * E 6
A R C s
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
 92 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To clear each count, do the following:

• Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
• Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s A ?
• Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s B ?
• Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s C ?
• Select "Clear Σ I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ A ?
• Select "Clear Σ I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ B ?
 93 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Clear Σ I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r Σ I ＾ｙ C ?
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in back-up RAM.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status

From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the top "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
＞ M e t e r i n g
D i r e c t i o n Display at model 820 and 821
B i n a r y I / O
R e l a y e l e m e n t
T i m e s y n c .
C l o c k a d j u s t .
L C D c o n t r a s t
• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.(Primary current display setting)
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
I a * * . * * k A
I b * * . * * k A
I c * * . * * k A
I e * * . * * k A
I s e * * * * k A Not available for model 400 series.
I 1 * * . * * k A Not available for model 820 and 821.
I 2 * * . * * k A Not available for model 820 and 821.
 94 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I 2 / I 1 * * . * * Not available for model 820 and 821.
T H M * * * . * %
V e * * * . * * k V Display at model 820 and 821
I a m a x * * . * * k A
I b m a x * * . * * k A
I c m a x * * . * * k A
I e m a x * * . * * k A
I s e m a x * * * * k A Not available for model 400 series.
I 2 m a x * * . * * k A Not available for model 820 and 821.
I 2 1 m a x * * . * * Not available for model 820 and 821.
V e m a x * * * . * * k V Display at model 820 and 821
To clear all max data, do the following:

• Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r m a x ?
• Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in back-up RAM.
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
 95 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
• Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
The display format is shown below.

[      ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 FAIL
Output (OP2) BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI6 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit. BI3 to BI6 are not available for model 400 and 420.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO4 and FAIL are configurable.
The status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output
relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
FAIL is a normally closed contact for detection of a relay fail condition.
Line 3 shows the binary output status for model 402 or 422. BO5-8 (OP2) are available only at
model 402 or 422.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
• Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
A O C 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
B O C 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
C O C 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
E F 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for model 820 and 821.
S E 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ] Not available for model 400 series.
A U C 1 ･ 2 [ 0 0 ]
B U C 1 ･ 2 [ 0 0 ]
C U C 1 ･ 2 [ 0 0 ]
T H M [ 0 0 ]
 96 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
N P S , B C [ 0 0 0 ] Not available for model 820 and 821.
C B F A B C [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
C o l d L d [ 0 0 0 0 ]
I C D [ 0 0 0 ]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[    ]
A OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 A phase OC elements
B OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 B phase OC elements
C OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 C phase OC elements
EF1-4 EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4
SE1-4 SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4
A UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - A phase UC elements
B UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - B phase UC elements
C UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - C phase UC elements
THM Alarm Trip - -
NPS, BC NPS1 NPS2 - BC
A B C A B C
CBFABC
CBF TRIP CBF RETRIP
Cold Ld 0 1 2 3 Cold Load state
ICD A B C
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the element
is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRE110 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary input
signal clock, Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP(IEC61850). To display on the LCD whether
these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock the relay is synchronised with,
do the following:
• Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
* B I : A C T .
M o d b u s : I n a c t .
I E C I n a c t
S N T P I n a c t
 97 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
• Select "Status" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
• Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 2 6 / A u g / 2 0 0 9
0 0 : 0 0 : 0 0 [ L ]
> M i n u t e
0 _
H o u r
0 _
D a y
2 6 _
M o n t h
8 _
Y e a r
2 0 0 9 _
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [M] or [S] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
• Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.
• Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return to
the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
 98 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 2 L C D C o n t r a s t
■ ■ ■ ■
• Press the ▲
▼
or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
▲
▼
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.+
4.2.4.7 Direction
The direction display is available at model 820 and 821.
To display thedirection of earth fault current for testing, do the following:
• Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 D i r e c t i o n
I s e - - - - - - -
At normal condition, display “-------”. If the Ise input dirrection is same as Ve, displayed
“Forwaed”. If the Ise input direction is same as –Ve, displayed “Reverse”.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings

The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the "Set. (change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the Modbus communication or optional communication.
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
 99 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
> V e r s i o n
D e s c r i p t i o n
C o m m s
R e c o r d
S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
F r e q u e n c y
• Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.
/ 2 V e r s i o n
> R e l a y t y p e
S o f t w a r e .
• Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number. (ex.;GRE110-400A-10-10)
G R E 1 1 0 - 4 0 0 A - 1 0
- 1 0
• Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version and PLC data.
(ex.;GS1EM1-01-A)
■ S o f t w a r e
G S 1 E M 1 - 0 1 - *
■ P L C d a t a
P G R E 1 1 0 A * * *
( * * * * * * * * )
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description","Comms","Record","Status","Protection","Binary I/P","Binary O/P","LED" ,
"Control" and "Frequency" screens display the current settings input using the "Set.(change)"
sub-menu.
 100 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6 Changing the Settings

The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and IP address
Baud rate in IEC60870-103 or Modbus
IEC 61850 setting
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Control setting
Frequency setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist between
the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or inactive) depending
on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all necessary settings
changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the "active
group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys.
If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
 101 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
> P a s s w o r d
C o m m s
R e c o r d
S t a t u s
P r o t e c t i o n
B i n a r y I / P
B i n a r y O / P
L E D
C o n t r o l
F r e q u e n c y
• Move the cursor to a setting item.

• Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
To select a character, use keys ▼ , ▲ ,

▲
and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and

right. "→" and "←" on final line indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A maximum of 22
characters can be entered.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f
g h i j K l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "→" or "←" and pressing the ENTER key.
• Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.

• Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
• Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
 102 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:

• Discard the character by selecting "←" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
• Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment. The
cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the ▲ and ▼ keys. If
setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the ▲ and ▼ keys.
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O C 2 . 0 0 A
E F 0 . 6 0 A
S E F 0 . 2 0 0 A Not available for model 400 series.
N P S 0 . 4 0 A Not available for model 820 series.
• Move the cursor to a setting line.

• Press the
▲
▲
or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or
▼
key.
• Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
• After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
• If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new numerical
value.
• If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
▲ and ▼ keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note:If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper one.
To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings are
not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
• Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the "Set.
(change)" sub-menu.
 103 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
• When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new settings,
or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen turns back
to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel entries made so far
and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of setting changes password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
• Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
• Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
• For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
• Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different from
that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password" screen
before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
 104 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S e t . ( c h a n g e )
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen. The
"Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MAIN MENU" screen.
The screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password
again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
> P l a n t n a m e
• To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
• To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Enter the text string.
 105 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with Modbus or optional communication, the relay address must be set. Do this
as follows:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s
＞ A d d r . / P a r a m .
S w i t c h
• Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m .
M o d b u s _
This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in
> M o d b u s 1 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C 1
I P 1 ‐ 1 0
I P 1 ‐ 2 0
I P 1 ‐ 3 0
I P 1 ‐ 4 0
This setting is displayed if submodel of
S M 1 ‐ 1 0 communication type is A-D.
S M 1 ‐ 2 0
S M 1 ‐ 3 0
S M 1 ‐ 4 0
G W 1 ‐ 1 0
G W 1 ‐ 2 0
G W 1 ‐ 3 0
G W 1 ‐ 4 0
I P 2 ‐ 1 0
I P 2 ‐ 2 0
I P 2 ‐ 3 0
I P 2 ‐ 4 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of

communication type is B or D.
S M 2 ‐ 1 0
S M 2 ‐ 2 0
S M 2 ‐ 3 0
S M 2 ‐ 4 0
G W 2 ‐ 1 0
G W 2 ‐ 2 0
G W 2 ‐ 3 0
G W 2 ‐ 4 0
 106 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I E C B 1 1
I E C B 2 2
I E C B 3 3
I E C B 4 4
I E C G T 1
I E C A T 1
I E C B T 1
I E C C T 1
I E C E 1 0 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C E 2 0
I E C E 3 0
I E C E 4 0
I E C E 5 0
I E C E 6 0
I E C E 7 0
I E C E 8 0
I E C I 1 0
I E C I 2 0
I E C I 3 0
I E C I 4 0
I E C I 5 0
I E C I 6 0
I E C I 7 0
I E C I 8 0
I E C 2 B 1 1
I E C 2 B 2 2
I E C 2 B 3 3
I E C 2 B 4 4
I E C 2 G T 1
I E C 2 A T 1
I E C 2 B T 1 communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C 2 C T 1
I E C 2 E 1 0
I E C 2 E 2 0
I E C 2 E 3 0
I E C 2 E 4 0
I E C 2 E 5 0
I E C 2 E 6 0
I E C 2 E 7 0
I E C 2 E 8 0
I E C 2 I 1 0
I E C 2 I 2 0
I E C 2 I 3 0
 107 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I E C 2 I 4 0
I E C 2 I 5 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of

communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
I E C 2 I 6 0 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
I E C 2 I 7 0
I E C 2 I 8 0
S M O D E 0 communication type is A-D.
G O I N T 1 s
D E A D T 1 s communication type is A-D and
“RS485P” in comms switch settimg
is ”off”.
• Enter the relay address number on the "Modbus" line for Modbus or the "IEC" line for
IEC60870-5-103 and press the ENTER key.
• Enter IP address for IP1-1 to IP1-4, Subnet mask for SM1-1 to SM1-4, Default gateway for
GW1-1 to GW1-4, and SNTP server address for SI1-1 to SI2-4. two SNTP servers are
available.
Enter "0" or "1" on "SMODE" column to set the standard time synchronized mode for SNTP
server. Using low accuracy level of time server, synchronized compensation to maintain
synchronization accuracy may not be done automatically. Therefore enter "1", and
synchronized compensation is done forcibly. The default setting is "0".
Enter the IP address of the device for PG1-1 to PG2-4 if Ping response is checked.
IP address: ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗. ∗∗∗ (IP1-1. IP1-2. IP1-3. IP1-4) and (IP2-1. IP2-2. IP2-3. IP2-4)
SM1-1 to SM2-4, GW1-1 to GW2-4, SI1-1 to SI2-4: same as above.
• Press the ENTER key.
CAUTION: Do not duplicate the relay address number.
Settings for IEC60870-5-103 communication

The lines "IECB1" to "IECB4" are used for auxiliary inputs for IEC103 events INF27 to
INF30 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECB1" to "IECB4" by entering the
number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.
The lines "IECGT" to "IECCT" are used for fault indications for IEC103 events INF68 to
INF71 in Appendix N. Assign signals to the columns "IECGT" to "IECCT" by entering the BO
numbers (1 to 8) corresponding to the binary output settings.
The lines "IECE1" to "IECE8" are used to assign the signals for user customization. Assign
signals to the columns "IECE1" to "IECE8" by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B.
Note: Assign "0" to the column when the function is not used.
The lines "IECI1" to "IECI8" are used to assign the above signals from "IECE1" to "IECE8" to
each INF number. Enter the INF number to the columns "IECI1" to "IECI8".
Settings for IEC61850 communication
Enter the time on "GOINT" to set the maximum GOOSE message publishing term if GOOSE
message receive checked. Enter the time on "DEADT" to set the Keep Alive time of IEC 16850
communication.
Setting for Modbus communication
• Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., for Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 and IEC61850.
 108 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 3 S w i t c h
R S 4 8 5 B R
> R S 4 8 5 B R
9 . 6 / 1 9 . 2
I E C B L K 0 This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in

N o r m a l / B l o c k e d
R S 4 8 5 P 0
O f f / M o d / I E C 1 0 3
E t h e r P 0
O f f / I E C 6 1 8 5 0
6 1 8 5 0 B L K 0 communication type is A-D and
N o r m a l / B l o c k e d “RS485P” in comms switch settimg
is ”off”.
T S T M O D 0
O f f / O n
G S E C H K 0
O f f / O n
P I N G C H K 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of

communication type is A0-D0.
O f f / O n
I E C G I 1 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 2 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 3 0
N o / Y e s This setting is displayed if “RS485P” in

I E C G I 4 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 5 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 6 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 7 0
N o / Y e s
I E C G I 8 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 1 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 2 0 communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 3 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 4 0
N o / Y e s
 109 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I E C 2 G I 5 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 6 0 This setting is displayed if submodel of
N o / Y e s communication type is 2 and “RS485P” in
I E C 2 G I 7 0
N o / Y e s
I E C 2 G I 8 0
N o / Y e s
I E C N F I 0 comms switch settimg is ”IEC103”.
1 . 2 / 2 . 4
<RS485BR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the Modbus or IEC60870-5-103 protocols are applied.
<IECBLK>
Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<IECNFI >
This line is to select the normalized factor (1.2 or 2.4) of the current measurand.
<IECGI1 - 8 >
These lines are to use the GI (General Interrogation) or not for user customized signals. If GI is to
be used , enter 1(=Yes).
<RS485P>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the MODBUS or IEC60850-5-103 system
applied.
<EtherP>
This line is to select the communication protocol when the IEC61850 system applied.
<61850BLK>
Select 1 (=Blocked) to block transmission from relay to BCU for IEC61850 communication. When
using the IEC61850 communication, select 0 (=Normal).
<TSTMOD>
Select 1 (=On) to set the test mode in IEC61850 communication.
<GSECHK>
This function is to alarm if any one of the GOOSE messages written in a GOOSE subscribe file
cannot be received.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a GOOSE receive check for IEC61850 communication.
<PINGCHK>
This function is to check the health of the network by regularly sending a ‘Ping’ to IP address which
is set on PG∗-∗.
Select 1 (=On) to execute a ‘Ping’ response check.
• Select the number and press the ENTER key.
 110 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
• Select "Set. (change)" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
• Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/ 2 R e c o r d
> E v e n t
D i s t u r b a n c e
C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording

/ 3 E v e n t
B I 1 c o m m . _
> B I 1 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 2 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 3 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 4 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 5 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
B I 6 c o m m . 3
N / O / R / B
• Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording

> T i m e / S t a r t e r
S c h e m e s w
B i n a r y s i g .
 111 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.
/ 4 T i m e / S t a r t e r
T i m e 1 _ s
> T i m e 1 2 . 0 s
T i m e 2 2 . 0 s
O C 2 . 0 0 A
E F 0 . 6 0 A
S E F 0 . 2 0 0 A Not available for model 400 series.
N P S 0 . 4 0 A Not available for model 820 series
• Enter the recording time and starter element settings.

To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T R I P _
> T R I P 1
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O C 1
O f f / O n
E F 1
O f f / O n
S E F 1 Not available for model 400 series.
O f f / O n Not available for model 400 series.
N P S 1 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n Not available for model 820 series.
• Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
• Select "Binary sig." on the "Disturbance" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1 _
> S I G 1 5 1
S I G 2 5 1
S I G 3 5 1
S I G 4 5 1
S I G 5 5 1
S I G 6 5 1
 112 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S I G 3 2 5 1
• Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B.
Setting the counter

/ 3 C o u n t e r
> S c h e m e s w
A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N _
> T C S P E N 1
O f f / O n / O p t - O n
C B S M E N 1
O f f / O n
T C A E N 1
O f f / O n
Σ I y A E N 1
O f f / O n
O P T A E N 1
O f f / O n
• Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.

To set threshold setting, do the following:
• Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t
T C A L M _
> T C A L M 1 0 0 0 0
Σ I y A L M 1 0 0 0 0 E 6
Y V A L U E 2 . 0
O P T A L M 5 0 0 0 m s
• Enter the threshold settings.
 113 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
> M e t e r i n g
T i m e s y n c .
T i m e z o n e communication type is A-D.
Setting the metering

• Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y _
> D i s p l a y 1
P r i / S e c / P r i - A
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).
Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal or Modbus or
IEC103 or SNTP. This is selected by setting as follows.
• Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c . _
> T i m e s y n c . 1
O f f / B I / M o d / 1 0 3 /
S N T P
• Enter 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=Mod) to be synchronised with the Modbus.
Enter 3(=103) to be synchronised with the IEC103.
Enter 4(=SNTP) to be synchronised with the SNTP.
 114 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Note: When selecting BI or Modbus, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status"
sub-menu.
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI or Modbus, the calendar clock runs locally.
Setting the time zone

When the calendar clock is synchronized with the SNTP time standard, it is possible to transform
GMT to the local time.
• Select "Time zone" to display the "Time zone" screen.
• Enter the difference between GMT and local time. Enter numerical values to GMT (hours)
and GMTm (minutes), and press the ENTER key.
/ 3 T i m e z o n e .
G M T _
> G M T + 0 h r s
G M T m + 0 m i n
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRE110 can have 2 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
• Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
> C h a n g e a c t . g p .
C h a n g e s e t
C o p y g p .
Changing the active group

• Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . _
> A c t i v e g p . 1
• Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
 115 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix D and H. To change the settings, do the following:
• Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 1
> C o m m o n
G r o u p 1
G r o u p 2
Setting the common

To set the application setting, do the following.
/ 4 C o m m o n
A O L E D _
> A O L E D 1
O f f / O n
<AOLED>
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
• Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the ENTER
key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the group

• Select the group to change the settings and press the ENTER key.
/ 4 G r o u p ＊
> P a r a m e t e r
T r i p
A R C
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name and the CT ratio as follows:
• Select "Parameter" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
> L i n e n a m e
C T r a t i o On model 820 and 821,”CT/VT ratio”
• Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.

• Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
 116 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.
/ 6 C T r a t i o
O C C T _
> O C C T ４ 0 0
E F C T 2 0 0 Not available for model 420 series.

S E F C T 4 0 0 Not available for model 400 series.
V E V T 0 Display at model 820 and 821
• Enter the CT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
• Select "Trip" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
> S c h e m e s w
P r o t . e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

• Select "Scheme sw" to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
> A p p l i c a t i o n
P F p r o t .
E F p r o t .
S E F p r o t . Not available for model 400 series.
M i s c . p r o t .
Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.
• Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n
M O C 1 _
> M O C 1 1
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M O C 2 1
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M E F 1 1 Not available for model 820 series.
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
 117 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
M E F 2 1 Not available for model 820 series.
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M S E 1 1 Not available for model 400 series.
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M S E 2 1 Not available for model 400 series.
D / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
S V C N T 1 Not available for model 820 series.
A L M & B L K / A L M
<MOC1>, <MEF1>, <MSE1>, <MOC2>, <MEF2>, <MSE2>

To set the OC1, EF1, SE1, OC2, EF2 and SE2 time delay characteristic type, do the following.
• Enter 0(=D, Definite Time) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C, Configurable) and press
the ENTER key.
<SVCNT>
Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic
supervision.
• Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the PF protection

• Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/ 7 P F p r o t .
O C 1 E N _
> O C 1 E N 1
O f f / O n
M O C 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I
M O C 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M O C 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
O C 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
O C 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 2 E N 1
O f f / O n
M O C 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I
 118 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
M O C 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M O C 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
O C 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
O C 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 3 E N 1
O F f / O n
O C 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 4 E N 1
O f f / O n
O C 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
U C 1 E N 1
O f f / O n
U C 2 E N 1
O f f / O n
<OC1EN>, <OC2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC1 or OC2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC1 or
OC2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MOC1C>, <MOC2C>
To set the Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
the ENTER key.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<OC1R>, <OC2R>
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
• If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and
<OC3EN, OC4EN, UC1EN, UC2EN>

• Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The OC4, UC1 and UC2 are the same.
 119 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<OC1-2F, OC2-2F, OC3-2F, OC4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection

• Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen. (Not available for Model 820 series)
/ 7 E F p r o t .
E F 1 E N _
> E F 1 E N 1
O f f / O n
M E F 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I
M E F 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M E F 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
E F 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
E F 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 2 E N 1
O f f / O n
M E F 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I
M E F 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M E F 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
E F 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
E F 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 3 E N 1
 120 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f f / O n
E F 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 4 E N 1
O f F / O n
E F 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
<EF1EN>, <EF2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF1 or EF2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF1 or
EF2, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<MEF1C>, <MEF2C>
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
the ENTER key.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<EF1R>, <EF2R>
• If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press
the ENTER key.
<EF3EN, EF4EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF3, enter 0(=Off)
and press the ENTER key. The EF4 is the same.
<EF1-2F, EF2-2F, EF3-2F, EF4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
 121 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting the SEF protection

• Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen. (Not available for Model 400 series)
/ 7 S E F p r o t .
S E 1 E N _
> S E 1 E N 1
O f f / O n
S E 1 - D I R 0
Display at model 820 series.
F W D / R E V / N O N
M S E 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M S E 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M S E 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
S E 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
S E 1 S 2 0
O f f / O n
S E 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 2 E N 1
O f f / O n
S E 2 - D I R 0
M S E 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 1(=IEC).

N I / V I / E I / L T I
M S E 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE).

M I / V I / E I
M S E 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 3(=US).

C O 2 / C O 8
S E 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE),

D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
S E 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 3 E N 1
O f F / O n
S E 3 - D I R 0
S E 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 4 E N 1
 122 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f F / O n
S E 4 - D I R 0
S E 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
Z P E N 0
O f f / O n
<SE1EN>, <SE2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF1 or SEF2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF1,
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<SE∗-DIR>
The settings are for model 820 series,to set SEF∗ directional characteristic, do the following.
• Enter 0(=FWD) or 1(=REV) or 2(=NON) and press the ENTER key.<MSE1C>, <MSE2C>
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the
ENTER key.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER
key.
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
<SE1R>, <SE2R>
• If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the
ENTER key.
<SE1S2>
To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<SE3EN, SE4EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The SEF4 is the same.
<SE1-2F, SE2-2F, SE3-2F, SE4-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the SE1, SE2, SE3 and SE4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
 123 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<ZPEN>
The setting is for model 820 series,to set the zero phase sequence power block enable of SEF, do
the following.
• Enter 1(=On) to enable "Trip block" by the residual power block function and press the
ENTER key. If disabling it, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the Misc. protection

The settings for miscellaneous protection are as follows:
• Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/ 7 M i s c . p r o t .
T H M E N _
> T H M E N 1
O f f / O n
T H M A E N 0
O f f / O n
N P S 1 E N 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n ditto
N P S 1 - 2 F 0 Not available for model 820 series.
N A / B l o c K ditto
N P S 2 E N 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n ditto
N P S 2 - 2 F 0 Not available for model 820 series.
B C D E N 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n ditto
B C D - 2 F 0 Not available for model 820 series.
B T C 0
O f f / O n
R T C 0
O f f / D I R / O C
C L S G 0
O f f / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
C L D O E N 0
O f f / O N
 124 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<THMEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal
OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<THMAEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<NPS1EN>, <NPS2EN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the NPS1EN and NPS2EN and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
NPS1EN, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<BCDEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<NPS1-2F, NPS2-2F, BCD-2F>

• Enter 1(=Block) to block the NPS1, NPS2 and BCD against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
<BTC>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the
Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
<RTC>
To set the Re-trip control, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
<CLSG>
To set the Cold Load settings group, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
<CLDOEN>
• Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 125 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting the protection elements

• Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
> P F p r o t .
E F p r o t .
S E F p r o t . Not available for model 400 series.
M i s c . p r o t .
Setting the PF protection

• Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/ 7 P F p r o t .
O C 1 _ A
> O C 1 1 . 0 0 A
T O C 1 1 . 0 0 0 OC1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T O C 1 1 . 0 0 s OC1 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC1]= 0.
T O C 1 R 0 . 0 s OC1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC1] = 1 or [OC1R] = 0.
T O C 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [OC1R] = 1.
O C 2 1 . 0 0 A
T O C 2 1 . 0 0 0 OC2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.

T O C 2 1 . 0 0 s OC2 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC2]= 0.
T O C 2 R 0 . 0 s OC2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC2]
T O C 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [OC2R] = 1.
O C 3 1 . 0 0 A
T O C 3 0 . 0 0 s
O C 4 1 . 0 0 A
T O C 4 0 . 0 0 s
O C 1 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC1

O C 1 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 1 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC1
O C 2 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC2
O C 2 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of OC2
 126 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
U C 1 1 . 0 0 A
T U C 1 0 . 0 0 s
U C 2 1 . 0 0 A
T U C 2 0 . 0 0 s
• Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Note: Default current settings are shown for a 1A rated relay. They must be multiplied by 5 in the
case of a 5A rated version.
Setting the EF protection

• Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen. (Not available for model 820 series.)
/ 7 E F p r o t .
E F 1 _ A
> E F 1 1 . 0 0 A
T E F 1 1 . 0 0 0 EF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.

T E F 1 1 . 0 0 s EF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF1] =0.
T E F 1 R 0 . 0 s EF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF1] = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
T E F 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [EF1R] = 1.
E F 2 1 . 0 0 A
T E F 2 1 . 0 0 0 EF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.

T E F 2 1 . 0 0 s EF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF2] =0.
T E F 2 R 0 . 0 s EF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF2] = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
T E F 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [EF2R] = 1.
E F 3 1 . 0 0 A
T E F 3 0 . 0 0 s
E F 4 1 . 0 0 A
T E F 4 0 . 0 0 s
E F 1 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF1

E F 1 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF1
E F 1 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF1
 127 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
E F 2 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF2

E F 2 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF2
E F 2 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of EF2
Setting the SEF protection

• Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen. (Not available for model 400 series)
/ 7 S E F p r o t .
S E θ _ d e g
> S E θ 4 5 d e g Display at model 820 series. SEF characteristic angle
S E V 3 . 0 V Display at model 820 series. ZPS threshold setting.
S E 1 0 . 1 0 0 A
T S E 1 1 . 0 0 0 SEF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE1] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.

T S E 1 1 . 0 0 s SEF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE1] = 0.
T S E 1 R 0 . 0 s SEF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MSE1] = 1 or [SE1R] = 0.
T S E 1 R M 1 . 0 0 0 SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [SE1R] = 1.
T S E 1 S 2 0 . 0 0 s SEF1 Stage 2 Definite time setting.
S E 2 0 . 5 0 0 A
T S E 2 1 . 0 0 0 SEF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE2] = 1, 2, 3 or 4.

T S E 2 1 . 0 0 s SEF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE2] = 0.
T S E 2 R 0 . 0 s SEF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MSE2] = 1 or [SE2R] = 0.
T S E 2 R M 1 . 0 0 0 SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display if [SE2R] = 1.
S E 3 0 . 5 0 0 A
T S E 3 0 . 0 0 s
S E 4 0 . 5 0 0 A
T S E 4 0 . 0 0 s
S E 1 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE1

S E 1 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 1 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE1
S E 1 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE1
 128 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
S E 1 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE1

S E 2 - k 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 - α 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 - C 0 . 0 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 - k r 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE2
S E 2 - β 0 . 0 0 IDMT curve setting of SE2
Z P 0 . 0 0 W Display at model 820 series. Zero phase Power setting.
Setting the Misc. protection

• Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/ 7 M i s c . p r o t .
T H M _ A
> T H M 1 . 0 0 A
T H M 1 P 0 . 0 0 A
T T H M 1 0 . 0 m i n
T H M A 8 0 %
N P S 1 0 . 2 0 A Not available for model 820 series.
T N P S 1 0 . 0 0 s ditto
N P S 2 0 . 4 0 A ditto
T N P S 2 0 . 0 0 s ditto
B C D 1 . 0 0 s ditto
T B C D 0 . 0 s ditto
C B F 0 . 5 0 A
T B T C 0 . 5 0 s
T R T C 1 . 0 0 s
I C D - 2 F 1 5 %
I C D O C 0 . 1 0 A
T C L E 1 0 0 s
T C L R 1 0 0 s
I C L D O 0 . 5 0 A
T C L D O 0 . 0 0 s
 129 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting the autoreclose function

To set the autoreclose function, do the following.
• Select "ARC" on the "Group ∗" screen to display the "ARC" screen.
/ 5 A R C
> S c h e m e s w
A R C e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

• Select "Scheme sw" on the "ARC" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
> G e n e r a l
O C P r o t .
E F P r o t .
S E F P r o t . Not available for model 400 series.
M i s c P r o t .
Setting the the ARC General function

• Select "General" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose mode.
/ 7 G e n e r a l
A R C E N _
> A R C E N 1
O f f / O n
A R C - N U M 0
S 1 / S 2 / S 3 / S 4 / S 5
<ARCEN>
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or disable the autoreclose.
 130 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
<ARC-NUM>
• Enter 0 or 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 to set the number of shots.
Enter 0 (= S1) to perform single-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 1 (= S2) to perform two-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 2 (= S3) to perform three-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 3 (= S4) to perform four-shot autoreclosing.
Enter 4 (= S5) to perform five-shot autoreclosing.
Setting the OC, EF, SEF elements for ARC

• Select "OC" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the autoreclose initiation and trip mode of the OC
protection.
/ 7 O C P r o t .
O C 1 - I N I T _
> O C 1 - I N I T 0
N A / O n / B l o c K
O C 1 - T P 1 2
O F F / I n s t / S e t
O C 1 - T P 2 2
O C 1 - T P 3 2
O C 1 - T P 4 2
O C 1 - T P 5 2
O C 1 - T P 6 2
O C 2 - I N I T 0
O C 2 - T P 1 2
O F f / I n s t / S e t
O C 2 - T P 2 2
O C 2 - T P 3 2
O C 2 - T P 4 2
O C 2 - T P 5 2
O C 2 - T P 6 2
O C 3 - I N I T 0
 131 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O C 3 - T P 1 2
O C 3 - T P 2 2
O C 3 - T P 3 2
O C 3 - T P 4 2
O C 3 - T P 5 2
O C 3 - T P 6 2
O C 4 - I N I T 0
O C 4 - T P 1 2
O C 4 - T P 2 2
O C 4 - T P 3 2
O C 4 - T P 4 2
O C 4 - T P 5 2
O C 4 - T P 6 2
• Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to either initiate or block the autoreclose from the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
• Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to “Instantaneous trip” or “Set time delay trip”
in the "OC1-TP1". If not using the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 shows the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.
For OC2 to OC4, the settings are the same as OC1.
• Enter 1(=On) or 0(=Off) to enable or to disable the co-ordination for "COORD-OC" and press
the ENTER key.
After changing settings, press the ENTER key.

The setting method for the EF and SEF is same as that for the OC above.
Setting the ARC Misc. elements

• Select "Misc" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set external initiation of the autoreclose.
 132 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 7 M i s c P r o t .
E X T - I N I T _
> E X T - I N I T 0
N A / O n / B l o c k
• Enter 1(=On: INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block autoreclose from an external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
Setting ARC element

• Select "ARC element" on the "Group ∗" screen to set the timer setting and the threshold setting
of the OC, EF and SEF elements for co-ordination.
/ 6 A R C e l e m e n t
T R D Y _ s
> T R D Y 6 0 . 0 s
T D 1 1 0 . 0 0 s
T R 1 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T D 2 1 0 . 0 0 s
T R 2 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T D 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T R 3 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T D 4 1 0 . 0 0 s
T R 4 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T D 5 1 0 . 0 0 s
T R 5 3 1 0 . 0 0 s
T W 2 . 0 0 s
T S U C 3 . 0 s
T R C O V 1 0 . 0 s
T A R C P 1 0 . 0 s
T R S E T 3 . 0 0 s
• Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
 133 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
• Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C ｏｐｙ A t o B
> A _
B _
• Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
• Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme logic.
Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table 3.2.2.
• Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
> B I S t a t u s
B I 1
B I 2
B I 3
B I 4
B I 5
B I 6
A l a r m 1 T e x t
A l a r m 2 T e x t
A l a r m 3 T e x t
A l a r m 4 T e x t
Setting Binary Input Status

GRE110 can selected binary input detecting threshold voltage. The thresh hold voltage supports
control voltage of 24V, 48V, 110V and 220V.
The BI1 and BI2 can change three threshold voltage - 48 / 110 / 220V ( or 12 / 24 / 48V)
The BI3 to BI6 can change two threshold voltage – 110 / 220V (or 24 / 48V)
Note: The thresh hold voltage 48V (or 12V) of BI1 and BI2 is used for Trip Circuit Surpervision by
2 Binary inputs. See section 3.3.3.
The threshold voltage of 48-220V and 12-48 correspond by other relay model, respectively.
To set the binary inputs threshold voltage, do the following:

• Select "BI Status" on the "Binary I/P" screen to display the "BI Status" screen.
 134 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 3 B I S t a t u S
B I T H R 1
> B I T H R 1 1
4 8 / 1 1 0 / 2 2 0
B I T H R 2 0
1 1 0 / 2 2 0
<BITHR1>
To set the Binary Input 1 and 2 threshold voltage, do the following.
• Enter 0(=48V) or 1(=110V) or 2(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
<BITHR2>
To set the Binary Input 3 to 6 threshold voltage, do the following.
• Enter 0(=110V) or 1(=220V) and press the ENTER key.
Selection of Binary Input

• Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
Setting Alarm ∗ Text

If the BI selected is used for an alarm, alarm message can be set.
• Select the Alarm∗ text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v
w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( )
[ ] @ _ { } * / + - < = > ! “ ♯
$ % & ‘ : ; , . ^ `  
• Enter the characters (up to 22 characters) according to the text setting method.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI∗" screen.
/ 3 B I 1
> T i m e r s
F u n c t i o n s
 135 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting timers
• Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
B I 1 P U D _ s
> B I 1 P U D 0 . 0 0 s Pick-up delay setting

B I 1 D O D 0 . 0 0 s Drop-off delay setting
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
Setting Functions
• Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
B I 1 S N S _
> B I 1 S N S 0
N o r m / I n v
B I 1 S G S 0
O f f / 1 / 2
O C 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O C 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O C 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O C 4 B L K 0
O f f / O n
E F 1 B L K 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f g / O n
O f f / O n
O f f / O n
O f f / O n
S E 1 B L K 0 Not available for model 400 series.
O f f / O n
O f f / O n
 136 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
O f f / O n

O f f / O n
U C B L K 0
O f f / O n
T H M B L K 0
O f f / O n
N P S B L K 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n
B C D B L K 0 Not available for model 820 series.

O f f / O n
T C F A L M 0
O f f / O n
C B O P N 0
O f f / O n
C B C L S 0
O f f / O n
E X T 3 P H 0
O f f / O n
E X T A P H 0
O f f / O n
E X T B P H 0 Not available for model 820 series.
O f f / O n
E X T C P H 0
O f f / O n
R M T R S T 0
O f F / O n
S Y N C L K 0
O f f / O n
S T O R C D 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 1 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 2 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 3 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 4 0
O f f / O n
R M T O P N
O f f / O n
R M T C L S
O f f / O n
 137 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
C N T L C K
O f f / O n
A R C B L K
O f f / O n
A R C N A T
O f f / O n
A R C M C L
O f f / O n
<BI1SNS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
<BI1SGS>
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
<Others>
• Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
• After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI∗" screen.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRE110 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay. Available
signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
 138 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Selection of output relay

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
B O 5 Available for model 402 and 422.
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/ 3 B O ∗
> L o g i c / R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the logic gate type and timer

• Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D I / D w / L a t
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset timing

and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds on a digest screen.
 139 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 －－－
I n ♯ 2 －－－
I n ♯ 3 －－－
I n ♯ 4 －－－
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 176 (signal names:
"BO1 OP" to "BO8 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
CAUTION
The CB close control key ｜ is linked to BO1 and the CB open control key ○ is linked to BO2,
when control function is enable.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Three LEDs of the GRE110 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can be
viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be assigned to
each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs

• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
 140 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/ 4 L E D ∗
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
Setting the logic gate type and timer

L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
• Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "LED∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
 141 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 －－－
I n ♯ 2 －－－
I n ♯ 3 －－－
I n ♯ 4 －－－
• Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4 of “---”) by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Setting the LEDs color

• Select "LED color" on the "LED∗ " screen or on the "CB CLOSED" screen to display the
"LED color" screen.
/ 5 L E D C o l o r
C o l o r _
> C o l o r 0
R / G / Y
• Select the LED colors of red , green or yellow.

Repeat this process for the LED colors to be configured.
Selection of virtual LEDs

• Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
> I N D 1
I N D 2
• Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND∗" screen.
 142 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
/ 4 I N D 1
> R e s e t
F u n c t i o n s
Setting the reset timing

• Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t
R e s e t _
> R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
• Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
• Select "Functions" on the "IND∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 5 F n c t i o n s
B I T 1 _
> B I T 1 －－－
B I T 2 －－－
B I T 3 －－－
B I T 4 －－－
B I T 5 －－－
B I T 6 －－－
B I T 7 －－－
B I T 8 －－－
• Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
• Press the END key to return to the "IND∗" screen.

 143 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.6.11 Control
The GRE110 can control the Circuit Breaker(CB) open / close by the front panel keys.
The interlock function can be blocked the Circuit Breaker(CB) close command by the interlock
signals from binary input signal or communication command.
To set the control function and interlock function, do the following:
• Select "Control" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 2 C o n t r o l
C o n t r o l _
> C o n t r o l 0
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
I n t e r l o c k 0
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the control function use or not use and press the
ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Disable) or 1(=Enable) to select the interlock function use or not use and press the
ENTER key.
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.6.12 Frequency
The GRE110 can change setting of system frequency 50Hz or 60Hz.
• Select "Frequency" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Frequency" screen.
/ 2 F r e q u e n c y
F r e q u e n c y _
> F r e q u e n c y 0
5 0 H z / 6 0 H z
• Enter 0(=50Hz) or 1(=60Hz) to select the system frequency setting 50Hz or 60Hz and press the
ENTER key.
CAUTION
When having changed the system frequency settings, the GRE110 must reboot to enable the
setting change.
 144 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.7 Control
The sub-menu "Control" enables the CB control function by the front panel keys - ○ , ｜ and
L/R .
Note: When the Control function is disabled, both the "Local" LED and the "Remote" LED are not
lit, and the sub-menu "Control" on the LCD is not displayed.
4.2.7.1 Local / Remote Control

The "Local/Remote" function provides change of CB control hierarchy.
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
> P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
• Move the cursor to "Local/Remote" on LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
> L o c a l / R e m o t e
C B c l o s e / o p e n
• The L/R key is enabled to change the CB control hierarchy.
4.2.7.2 CB close / open Control

The "CB close/open" function provides CB control.
• Move the cursor to "CB close/open" on the LCD.
/ 1 C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d ( C t r l )
L o c a l / R e m o t e
> C B c l o s e / o p e n
• The ｜ and ○ keys are enabled to control CB – close / open.
4.2.7.3 Password
For the sake of security of control password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Control" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Control" screen.
 145 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

C o n t r o l
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
C o n t r o l
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Unmatch passwd!"
Password trap
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
C o n t r o l
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The
password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password again.
 146 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.8 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flashing. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flashing stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flashing only in a lighting state.
4.2.8.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to "OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
> P a s S w o r d ( T e s t )
S w i t c h
B i n A r y O / P
• Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.
/ 2 S w i t h
A . M . F _
> A . M . F 1
O f f / O n
C L P T S T 0
O f f / S 0 / S 3
T H M R S T 0
O f f / O n
S H O T N U M 0
O f f / S 1 - S 6
I E C T S T 0
O f f / O n
• Enter 0 or 1 to disable the A.M.F. or not and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) to reset forcibly the thermal overload element for testing (THMRST) and press
the ENTER key.
• Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
 147 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.2.8.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the external
devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
• Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T R Y = Y C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
• Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

• Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
4.2.8.3 Password
For the sake of security of testing password protection can be set as follows:
• Select "Test" on the "MAIN MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
 148 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
T e s t
I n p u t [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
T e s t
R e t y p e [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜
"Unmatch passwd!"
Password trap
screens.
If "TEST" is entered on the "MAIN MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "TEST"
sub-menu screens.
T e s t
P a s s w o r d [ _ ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ＜

"Test" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the "MAIN MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRE110 is canceled. Set the password again.
 149 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using a USB port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen using the PC interface software RSM100.
• Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display
• Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
• Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
At the optional communication model, RSM100 can use via Ethernet LAN.
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 MODBUS Interface

The GRE110 supports the MODBUS communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used when
the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measure and
status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
• Measurement data: current
• Status data: events, fault indications, counters, etc.
• Setting data
• Remote CB operation － Open / Close
• Time setting / synchronization
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps. These are selected by setting. See
Section 4.2.6.4.
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface
The GRE110 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly used
when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following measurand
and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix N.)
• Measurand data: current
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors 1.2
and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6 IEC 61850 Communication

GRE110 can also support data communication according to the IEC 61850 standard with the
provision of an optional communication board. Station bus communication as specified in IEC
61850-8-1 facilitates integration of the relays within a substation control and automation system
 150 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
via Ethernet LAN.

Figure 4.6.1 shows an example of a substation automation system using Ethernet-based IEC 61850
communication.
or TX
Figure 4.6.1 IEC 61850 Communication Network
4.7 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
• Event records
• Disturbance records
• Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock, IEC60870-5-103 or SNTP for IEC61850 etc. or Modbus.
This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal by
the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express
year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of
milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input
every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie the
number of seconds is incremented).
n sec (n+1) sec
500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and "RSM" is
 151 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
selected in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the relay
clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
4.8 Special Mode

The GRE110 shifts to the following special mode by specific key operation.
• LCD contrast adjustment mode
• Light check mode
LCD contrast adjustment mode

When the LCD is not displayed or not displayed clearly, the contrast adjustment of LCD might not
been appropriate. To adjust the contrast of LCD screen on the any screen, do the following:
• Press ▼ and ▲ ,at same time for 3 seconds or more to shift to LCD contrast adjustment mode.
L C D C o n t r a s t
■ ■ ■ ■
• Press the
▲
or key to adjust the contrast.
LCD and LED check mode

To check the LCD and LED check , do the following.
• Press
▲
key for 3 seconds or more when LCD is off.

• While pressing
▲
key all LEDs are lit and white dots appear on the whole LCD screen.
Colors of configurable LEDs (LED1-6) are user setting color.
• Release
▲
key , to finish the LCD and LED check mode.
 152 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check for
damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting
The relay case is designed for flush mounting using two mounting attachment kits.
Appendix F shows the case outlines.
127
5
14
117 13 5
Fig. 5.2.1 Outline of attachment kit
This attachment kits can be mounted on the panel thickness of 1-2.5mm when the included screws
M4x8 are used. When mounted on the panel thickness of 2.5-4.5mm, M4x10 screws and some
washers should be used.
5.2.1 Flush Mounting

For flush mounting the panel cut-out;
・Mount the case in the panel cut-out from front of panel. ; See Fig.5.2.2.
・Use the mounting attachment kits set ; See Fig.5.2.3.
・Tighten the M4 screw of the attachment kits ; see Fig.5.2.4.
The allowed range for the fixing screws’ tightening torque is 1.0…1.4Nm.
Do not tighten the screws too tightly.
 153 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
+0.2
143 -0.2
+0.2
-0.2
160
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A
+0.2
217 -0.2
+0.2
-0.2
160
(b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.1 Flush mounting the case into a panel cut-out
 154 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Fig. 5.2.2 Side view of GRE110 with the mounting attachment kit positions
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A, 421, 820 and 821A (b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.3 Rear view of GRE110 with tighten the screw of the mounting attachment kits
5.2.2 Dimensions
5.2.2.1 Power Supply

The power supply for the relay can be either DC (range 24-48Vdc, 48-110Vdc, 110-250Vdc) or
AC (110-220Vac-50/60Hz). The voltage range is specified on the relay indicator plate on the front
face. On models 400A, 401A, 420A 421A, 820A and 821A, the power supply should be connected
to terminals 13 and 14 of TB1 and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB1.
On models 402A and 422A, the power supply should be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of TB2
and the earthing should be connected to terminal 12 of TB2.
A minimum 1.25mm2 wire size recommended.
 155 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
5.2.2.2 Analogue inputs

GRE110-400A, 401A, 402A, 420A, 421A and 422A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth
current. GRE110-820A and 821A have 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth cuurent and earth
voltage. These current measuring inputs cover both 1 A and 5 A nominal values.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8
of TB1.
On models 402A and 422A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 8 of TB2.
On models 820A and 821A, the current inputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 4 and 7 to 8 of
TB1. The voltage inputs should be connected to terminal 5 to 6 of TB1.
A minimum 2.5 mm2 wire size recommended.
The current input and power supply terminals (TB1 or TB2) can be connected from both sides.
5.2.2.3 Binary inputs

The relay has 2 (or 6) opto-insulated logic inputs. Each input has is separately powered with a dc
voltage.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A, the binary inputs should be connected to
terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of TB2.
On models 402A and 422A, the binary inputs should be connected to terminals 13 to 16 (or 22) of
TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.4 Binary outputs (Output relays)

Five output relays are available on the relay. Four relays are programmable, the last relay being
assigned to the signaling of a relay fault. BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil
connection.
On models 400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A, the binary outputs should be connected to
terminals 1 to 10 of TB2.
On models 402A and 422A, the binary outputs should be connected to terminals 1 to 10 of TB3.
A minimum 1.25 mm2 wire size is recommended.
5.2.2.5 RS485 port

The communication connection (RS485 port) is assigned to terminals 21, 23 and 24 of TB2 at model
400A, 401A, 420A, 421A, 820A and 821A or TB3 at model 402A and 422A. The total length of
twisted pair wires should not exceed 1200 m.
The transmission wires should be terminated using a 120Ω resistor at both extreme ends of the
cable.
The binary input , binary output and RS485 communication terminal is a single side connected
terminal block.
The relay terminal block size and the clearance between the terminals are shown at Fig 5.2.4.
 156 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
17 24 17 24 42
TB2 TB3 TB2 TB1

TB1
6.35
8.7
8.7
6.35
6.35
7.62
10.0
10.0
7.62
7.62
(a) model 400A, 401A, 420A , 421A, 820A and 821A (b) model 402A and 422A
Fig. 5.2.4 Rear view of the relay
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not remove the relay PCB from the relay case since electronic components on the modules are
very sensitive to electrostatic discharge.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand volts.
Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits can cause
serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the reliability of the
circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case. Do
not expose them to risk of damage.
5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
5.6 Optinal case model S1-GRE110, S3-GRE110

GRE110 has optional case models S1-GRE110 and S3-GRE110.
These models have steel case and S3-GRE110 can realize 2 out of 3 relay logic.
Details are shown in 6F2T0191 and 6F2T0195
 157 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
GRE110 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which circuits
function when the power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.
The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
• When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and attach
the cover provided on top of it.
• Before remove the terminal block or cable of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
 158 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
• While the power is on, do not remove/connect the terminal block of the relay unit.
• Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
• Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
• If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase current source
1 Three-phase current source
1 power supply
3 AC ammeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and auxiliary
supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the USB port on the front of the relay. RSM100
software is required to run the PC.
For the details, see the separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 159 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a power supply and AC current source is
required.
The testing circuit figures used in this chapter show the circuit diagram for the 400A, 401A, 420A
and 421A models. In the case of the 402A and 422A models, TB1 replaces TB2 and TB2 replaces
TB3.
6.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD ･ LED display

• Apply the rated supply voltage and check that the LCD is off and the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit
in green..
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the supply voltage is
applied.
• Press
▲
key for 3 seconds or more and check that white dots appear on the whole screen and all
LEDs lit.
Operation keys
• Press ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU"
screen. Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
• Press ENTER key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MAIN MENU"
screen. Press any keys and check all keys operated.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit

The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
GRE110
TB2 -13
BI1
-14 BI2
BI3
BI4
- 19 BI5
BI6
- 20
+ TB1 - 13
power
supply − - 14
-12
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 160 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P [ 0 0 0 0 0 ]
O P 2 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
• Apply the rated supply voltage to terminal 13-14, 15-16, 17,18,19,20-21 of terminal block
TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The output
contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD displays
the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
• Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
• After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be performed
collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T R Y = Y C A N C E L = N
 161 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
• Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits

This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and verifying
that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase current source is required.
GRE110
A TB1 -1 Ia
Single-phase -2
current
source -3 Ib
-4
-5
Ic
-6
-7
IN
-8
+ TB1 -13
power
supply − -14
-12
Note: AC input terminal numbers depends on model.
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.

"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0(= Primary), change the setting to 1(=Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu → "Status" screen → "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
• Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu → "Metering" screen
• Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within ±5% of the input values.
6.5 Function Test

6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realised by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
 162 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION
After testing, must reset settings for testing to the original settings.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.
Assigning signal to LED

• Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
> L E D
V i r t u a l L E D
• Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
> L E D 1
L E D 2
L E D 3
L E D 4
L E D 5
L E D 6
C B C L O S E D
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED∗" screen.
/ 4 L E D ∗
F u n c t i o n s
L E D C o l o r
L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
 163 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Select "Functions" on the "LED∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _
I n ♯ 2 _ _ _
I n ♯ 3 _ _ _
I n ♯ 4 _ _ _
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates the “0”.
Assigning signal to Binary Output Relay

• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
> B O 1
B O 2
B O 3
B O 4
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
• Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the "BO∗"
screen.
/ 3 B O ∗
F u n c t i o n s
 164 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

L o g i c _
> L o g i c 0
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s / D l / D w / L a t
• Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
• Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key to return to the "BO∗" screen.
• Select "Functions" on the "BO∗" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n ♯ 1 _
> I n ♯ 1 _ _ _
I n ♯ 2 _ _ _
I n ♯ 3 _ _ _
I n ♯ 4 _ _ _
T B O 0 . 2 0 s
• Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix B,
and assign other gates the “0”.
6.5.1.1 Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF
The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
 165 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating current check

Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRE110
+ A TB1 -
∗
Single-phase
current
source -∗
−
+ TB1 -13
power
supply − -14
-12
∗: Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test Circuit
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No. Element Signal No.
OC1-A 51 UC1-A 71
OC2-A 54 UC2-A 74
OC3-A 57 CBF-A 82
OC4-A 60
• Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
 166 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating time check for IDMT curve

GRE110
TB1 -
A (∗)
Single-phase
current
source - ( ∗)
TB2- (∗∗)
BO ∗
- (∗∗)
+ TB1 -13
DC
power
supply − -14
-12
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(∗), (∗∗) : Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.2 Testing IDMT
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
OC1-A 51
OC2-A 54
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOCI on the "PF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Change set. (Act gp.= ∗)" screen → "Group∗"
screen → "Trip" screen → "Scheme sw" screen → "PF prot."
The test procedure is as follows:

• Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
• Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
 167 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.5.1.2 Earth fault element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4

The earth fault element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check

GRE110
+ A TB1 -5
Single-phase
current -6
source −
-7
-8
+ TB1 -13
power
supply − -14
-12
Figure 6.5.3 Test Circuit for EF and SEF Elements

EF1 63 SEF1 67
EF2 64 SEF2 68
EF3 65 SEF3 69
EF4 66 SEF4 70
• Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the value
at which the element operates.
 168 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Operating time check for IDMT curve

GRE110
Single-phase TB1 - 5
A
current
source -6
-7
TB2- (∗)
-8
BO ∗
- ( ∗)
+ TB1 -13
Power
supply
− -14
-12
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(∗) : Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.4 Testing IDMT for EF and SEF Elements
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
EF1 63 SEF1 67
EF2 64 SEF2 68
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MEFI or MSEI on the "EF prot." or
"SEF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu → "Protection" screen → "Change set. (Act gp.= ∗)" screen → "Group∗"
screen → "Trip" screen → "Scheme sw" screen → "EF prot." or "SEF prot." screen
The test procedure is as follows:

• Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2 × Is to 20 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-151 class 5.
6.5.1.3 Thermal overload element THMA and THMT

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.
 169 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Element Signal No.
THMA 77
THMT 78
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
• Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2 × Is to 10 × Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
2.5. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.4 Negative sequence overcurrent element NPS1 and NPS2

GRE110
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
Current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
+ TB1 -13
power
supply
− -14
-12
Figure 6.5.5 Testing NPS elements

Element Signal No.
NPS1 79
NPS2 80
 170 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Apply the three-phase balance current and the operating current value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the current applied.
6.5.1.5 Broken conductor detection element BCD

GRE110
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
+ TB1 -13
power
supply
− -14
-12
Figure 6.5.6 Testing BCD element

Element Signal No.
BCD 81
• Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.6 Cold load protection

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen on
the "Test" menu is used.
• Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
• Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting group [CLSG].
 171 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
6.5.2 Protection Scheme

In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping

• Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
• Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TCBF1 and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TCBF2.
6.5.3 Metering and Recording

The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "Fault" screen and
check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix C. There are internal events and external events by binary
input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the status of
binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input circuit test
(see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "Event" screen is correct. Some
of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display only
shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "Disturbance" screen and check
that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details on
how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
6.6 Conjunctive Tests
6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current transformers, check the load current with the metering displays
on the LCD screen.
• Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
• Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the load current.
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
I a * * . * * k A
I b * * . * * k A
I c * * . * * k A
I e * * . * * k A
I 1 * * . * * k A
I 2 * * . * * k A
I 2 / I 1 * * . * *
T H M * * * . * %
I a m a x * * . * * k A
 172 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
I b m a x * * . * * k A
I c m a x * * . * * k A
I e m a x * * . * * k A
I 2 m a x * * . * * k A
I 2 1 m a x * * . * *
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
by the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test

The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
• Set the breaker to be closed.
• Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 _
> B O 1 0
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
F A I L 0
BO1 to BO4 are output relays with one normally open contact.
• Enter 1 for BO2 and press the ENTER key.
• Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
O p e r a t e ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
• Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO2 and check that the circuit
breaker is tripped.
 173 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
• Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
• Repeat the above for BO1, BO3 and BO4.

6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing

The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test procedures
are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.1
shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable PLC,IEC 61850 data
Err: SUM ×(Flash memory)
Err: RAM ×(SRAM)
Err: BRAM ×(Backup RAM)
Err: EEP ×(EEPROM)
Err: A/D ×(A/D converter)
Err: CT* × (AC input circuit)(1) × (2)
Err: DRIVER × (BI,BO circuit)(1) × (2)
Err: PLC ×(PLC data)
Err: CormRun ×(Ethernet LAN)

Err: Ping ×(Ping response)
Err: Map ×(IEC61850 mapping data)

Err: GOOSE ×(GOOSE subscribe)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
* ; In case CT supervision set the Error level.
Alarms detected by supervision are traced by checking the "ALM: " screen on the LCD. Table 6.7.2
shows LCD messages and alarm locations.
 174 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Table 6.7.2 LCD Message and Alarm Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or Cable
ALM: CT ×(AC input circuit)(1) × (2)
ALM: TC ×(Trip circuit)(1) × (2)
ALM: CB ×(Circuit breaker)(1) × (2)
ALM: TP COUNT ×(Trip count)(1) × (2)
ALM: OP TIME × (Operation time) × (2)
ALM: ΣIY × (Trip current) × (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the power supply
circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "Relay Fail" LED is off, the failure is in the power supply
circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors.
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Correct power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay

If the failure is identified to be in the relay and the user has a spare relay, the user can recover the
protection by replacing the failed relay.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay replacement. Maintenance at the component level is not
recommended.
Check that the replacement relay has an identical Model Number and relay version (software type
form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section 4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings including the data related to the
PLC, IEC103 and IEC61850, etc. are restored the original settings.
The procedure of relay disinstallation and installation is as follows:

• Switch off the power supply.
WARNIN Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
• Remove the terminal blocks of relay leaving the wiring.
• To remove the relay unit from the panel, the screws of attachments are removed.
• Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
 175 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:

• When the attachment kits are removed, be careful for the relay not to fall from panel.
• The cover of front panel is closed while operating it.
6.7.4 Resumption of Service

After replacing the failed relay, take the following procedures to restore the relay to the service.
• Switch on the power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
• Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be −25°C to +70°C, but the temperature of 0°C to +40°C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 176 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing the
commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
• Check that all the external connections are correct.
• Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock are
correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
• Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during the
tests.
• Press ▼ key and check that no failure message is displayed on the "Auto-supervision" screen.
• Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit.
 177 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix A
Programmable Reset Characteristics and
Implementation of Thermal Model to
IEC60255-149
 178 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Programmable Reset Characteristics
The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset
feature. Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves,
inverse time delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset
characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type
overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive
fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached
during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent.
If a dependent time reset is applied, it attenuate the integrate current, and therefore in the intermittent
fault condition operates rapidly.
Figure A-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Instantaneous
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Dependent Time
Reset
Figure A-1
 181 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-149
Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  -t

θ = 2 1 - e τ 1  × 100% (1)
I AOL  
where:
θ = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the stator,
τ = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθ is expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected stator of
motor, where 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at
which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The
thermal limit for any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip
output when θ = 100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then θ will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant τ, as in Figure A-2. If θ = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
θ (%)
100%
I2 2 × 100%
I AOL
 - ｔ 
 
θ = I I 2 1 - e τ  × 100%
2
AOL  
 
t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (1) ∙∙∙∙∙ Cold curve
 I - I AOL 
 I2 - I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (2) ∙∙∙∙∙ Hot curve
 I - I AOL 
where: IP = prior load current.
 182 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
θ (%) Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
 183 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix B
Signal List
 184 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No. SIGNAL Name Contents

0 Not in use
1 BI1 COMMAND Binary Input signal of BI1
7 Not in use
8 Not in use
9 CONSTANT_0 constant 0
10 CONSTANT_1 constant 1
11 SET. GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1
12 SET. GROUP2 BI command of change active setting group2
13 Not in use
14 Not in use
15 OC1 BLOCK BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
19 EF1 BLOCK BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
23 SEF1 BLOCK BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
27 UC BLOCK BI command of UC protection scheme block
28 THM BLOCK BI command of THM protection scheme block
29 NPS BLOCK BI command of NPS protection scheme block
30 BCD BLOCK BI command of BCD protection scheme block
31 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
32 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact
33 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact
34 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
35 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase)
36 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase)
37 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase)
38 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset
39 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronize Clock
40 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record
41 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1
 185 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

45 ARC BLOCK ARC scheme block command
46 ARC NO ACT ARC not applied command
47 ARC MAN CLS ARC Manual close command
48 OC1-A_PICKUP OC1-A pick-up
49 OC1-B_PICKUP OC1-B pick-up
50 OC1-C_PICKUP OC1-C pick-up
51 OC1-A OC1-A relay element operate (*)
52 OC1-B OC1-B relay element operate (*)
53 OC1-C OC1-C relay element operate (*)
54 OC2-A OC2-A relay element operate (*)
55 OC2-B OC2-B relay element operate (*)
56 OC2-C OC2-C relay element operate (*)
57 OC3-A OC3-A relay element start
58 OC3-B OC3-B relay element start
59 OC3-C OC3-C relay element start
60 OC4-A OC4-A relay element start
61 OC4-B OC4-B relay element start
62 OC4-C OC4-C relay element start
63 EF1 EF1 relay element operate (*)
64 EF2 EF2 relay element operate (*)
65 EF3 EF3 relay element start
66 EF4 EF4 relay element start
67 SEF1 SEF1 relay element operate (*)
68 SEF2 SEF2 relay element operate (*)
69 SEF3 SEF3 relay element start
70 SEF4 SEF4 relay element start
71 UC1-A UC1-A relay element start
72 UC1-B UC1-B relay element start
73 UC1-C UC1-C relay element start
74 UC2-A UC2-A relay element start
75 UC2-B UC2-B relay element start
76 UC2-C UC2-C relay element start
77 THM-A THERMAL Alarm relay element operate
78 THM-T THERMAL Trip relay element operate
79 NPS1 NPS1 relay element start
80 NPS2 NPS2 relay element start
81 BCD BCD relay element start
82 CBF-A CBF-A relay element start
83 CBF-B CBF-B relay element start
84 CBF-C CBF-C relay element start
85 ICLDO-A ICLDO-A relay (OC relay) element start
86 ICLDO-B ICLDO-B relay (OC relay) element start
87 ICLDO-C ICLDO-C relay (OC relay) element start
88 OC1-A HS OC1-A relay element start (High Speed)
89 OC1-B HS OC1-B relay element start (High Speed)
 186 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

90 OC1-C HS OC1-C relay element start (High Speed)
91 EF1 HS EF1 relay element start (High Speed)
92 EF2 HS EF2 relay element start (High Speed)
93 OC1-A_INST OC1-A relay element start
94 OC1-B_INST OC1-B relay element start
95 OC1-C_INST OC1-C relay element start
96 EF1_INST EF1 relay element start
97 SEF1_INST SEF1 relay element start
98 OC1_INST OC1 relay element start
99 EF1 PICKUP EF1 pick-up
100 EF2 PICKUP EF2 pick-up
101 OC1 TRIP OC1 trip command
102 OC1-A TRIP OC1 trip command (A Phase)
103 OC1-B TRIP OC1 trip command (B Phase)
104 OC1-C TRIP OC1 trip command (C Phase)
114 OC4-A ALARM OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
115 OC4-B ALARM OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
116 OC4-C ALARM OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
117 EF1 TRIP EF1 trip command
120 EF4 ALARM EF4 alarm command
121 SEF1-S1 TRIP SEF1 Stage1 trip command
122 SEF1-S2 TRIP SEF1 Stage2 trip command
123 SEF2 TRIP SEF2 trip command
124 SEF3 TRIP SEF3 trip command
125 SEF4 ALARM SEF4 alarm command
126 UC1 TRIP UC1 trip command
127 UC1-A TRIP UC1 trip command (A Phase)
128 UC1-B TRIP UC1 trip command (B Phase)
129 UC1-C TRIP UC1 trip command (C Phase)
130 UC2 ALARM UC2 alarm command
131 UC2-A ALARM UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
132 UC2-B ALARM UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
133 UC2-C ALARM UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
134 THM ALARM Thermal alarm command
 187 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

135 THM TRIP Thermal trip command
136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command
137 NPS2 TRIP NPS2 alarm command
138 BCD TRIP BCD trip command
139 CBF RETRIP CBF retrip command
140 CBF TRIP CBF back trip command
141 GEN.TRIP General Trip command
142 GEN.TRIP-A General Trip command (A Phase)
143 GEN.TRIP-B General Trip command (B Phase)
144 GEN.TRIP-C General Trip command (C Phase)
145 GEN.TRIP-EF General Trip command (EF)
146 CLP STATE0 Cold Load Protection Stage0
150 GEN.ALARM General alarm command
151 Not in use
152 Not in use
153 OC2-A_INST OC2-A relay element start
154 OC2-B_INST OC2-B relay element start
155 OC2-C_INST OC2-C relay element start
156 EF2_INST EF2 relay element start
157 SEF2_INST SEF2 relay element start
158 OC2_INST OC2 relay element start
159 Not in use
160 A.M.F.OFF Automatic monitoring function off
161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure
164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm
166 ΣI^y ALM ΣIY alarm
167 OT ALARM Operate time alarm
168 Not in use
169 Not in use
170 BO1OP Binary Output1 operated
178 OC2-A PICKUP OC2-A pick-up
179 OC2-B PICKUP OC2-B pick-up
180 OC2-C PICKUP OC2-C pick-up
 188 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

181 LCD IND. LCD indication (Virtual LED) command
182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1 (Virtual LED) command
183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2 (Virtual LED) command
184 SEF1 PICKUP SEF1 pick-up
185 SEF2 PICKUP SEF2 pick-up
186 TESTING Testing LED lit output
187 CBF OP-A CBF start or external trip input signal (A phase)
188 CBF OP-B CBF start or external trip input signal (B phase)
189 CBF OP-C CBF start or external trip input signal (C phase)
190 GEN_PICKUP General start / pick-up
191 Not in use
192 Not in use
193 PROT_COM_ON IEC103 protection command
194 IECTST IEC103 communication test
195 IECBLK IEC013 communication block
196 NORM_LED_ON IN_SERVICE LED ON
197 TRIP_LED_ON TRIP LED ON
198 Not in use
199 Not in use
200 Not in use
201 BI1 COMMAND1 Binary Input signal of BI1 after BI1SNS
207 Not in use
208 Not in use
209 Not in use
210 ARC_BLK_OR Auto-Reclosing block
211 ARC_READY_T Auto-Reclosing ready condition
212 ARC_IN-PROG Auto-Reclosing in-progress conditon
213 ARC_SHOT Auto-Reclosing shot
214 ARC_SHOT1 Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
219 ARC_FT Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
220 ARC_SUCCESS Auto-Reclosing succeed
221 ARC_COM_ON IEC103 communication command
222 ARC_COM_RECV Auto-recloser inactivate command received
223 Not in use
224 Not in use
225 ETH1_LINKUP Ether port 1 LINK-UP
226 ETH2_LINKUP Ether port 2 LINK-UP
 189 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

227 IEC61850_RUN IEC61850 run
228 GOOSE_IN_Q1 Goose quality#1
244 GOOSE_IN_1 Goose data#1
260 Not in use
261 ICD-A Inrush current detection (A Phase)
262 ICD-B Inrush current detection (B Phase)
263 ICD-C Inrush current detection (C Phase)
264 ZPF Residual Power Forward
265 ZPR Residual Power Reverse
266 Not in use
267 Not in use
268 Not in use
269 Not in use
270 Local Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Local state
271 Remote Circuit Breaker Control hierarchy Remote state
272 CB_OPC_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker open
 190 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

273 CB_CLC_L Local SW command of Circuit Breaker close
274 CB_OPC_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker open
275 CB_CLC_BI BI command of Circuit Breaker close
276 CB_OPC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker open
277 CB_CLC_COMM Communication command of Circuit Breaker close
278 LOCK_BI BI command of Interlock
279 LOCK_COMM Communication command of Interlock
280 CB OPOUT Circuit Breaker Open output
281 CB CLOUT Circuit Breaker Close output
282 OC1-OR OC1 relay element start
286 UC1-OR UC1 relay element start
287 UC2-OR UC2 relay element start
288 CBF-OR CBF relay element start
289 ICD-OR ICD relay element start
290 IDMT_s1_a OC1 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
291 IDMT_s1_b OC1 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
292 IDMT_s1_c OC1 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
293 IDMT_s1_e EF1 integrated value = 0
294 IDMT_s1_se SEF1 integrated value = 0
295 IDMT_s2_a OC2 integrated value = 0 (A Phase)
296 IDMT_s2_b OC2 integrated value = 0 (B Phase)
297 IDMT_s2_c OC2 integrated value = 0 (C Phase)
298 IDMT_s2_e EF2 integrated value = 0
299 IDMT_s2_se SEF2 integrated value = 0
300 Not in use
301 ARC_INIT ARC initiation command
302 ARC_READY ARC ready command
303 ARC-S1_COND Auto-reclosing shot1 condition
308 TEMP001 Temporary output signal
(*) The signal is activated when “definite time element starts” or “inverse time
element operates”.
 191 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix C
Event Record Items
 192 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
No. LCD indication Contents

1 GEN.trip Off / On General trip command
2 GEN.trip-A Off / On General trip command (A Phase)
3 GEN.trip-B Off / On General trip command (B Phase)
4 GEN.trip-C Off / On General trip command (C Phase)
5 GEN.trip-EF Off / On General trip command (EF)
6 OC1-A trip Off / On OC1 trip command (A Phase)
7 OC1-B trip Off / On OC1 trip command (B Phase)
8 OC1-C trip Off / On OC1 trip command (C Phase)
15 OC4-A alarm Off / On OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
16 OC4-B alarm Off / On OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
17 OC4-C alarm Off / On OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
18 EF1 trip Off / On EF1 trip command
21 EF4 alarm Off / On EF4 alarm command
22 SEF1-S1 trip Off / On SEF1 Stage1 trip command
23 SEF1-S2 trip Off / On SEF1 Stage2 trip command
24 SEF2 trip Off / On SEF2 trip command
25 SEF3 trip Off / On SEF3 trip command
26 SEF4 alarm Off / On SEF4 alarm command
27 UC1-A trip Off / On UC1 trip command (A Phase)
28 UC1-B trip Off / On UC1 trip command (B Phase)
29 UC1-C trip Off / On UC1 trip command (C Phase)
30 UC2-A alarm Off / On UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
31 UC2-B alarm Off / On UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
32 UC2-C alarm Off / On UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
33 THM trip Off / On THM trip command
34 THM alarm Off / On THM alarm command
35 NPS1 trip Off / On NPS1 trip command
36 NPS2 alarm Off / On NPS2 alarm command
37 BCD trip Off / On BCD trip command
38 CBF retrip Off / On CBF retrip command
39 CBF trip Off / On CBF trip command
40 OC1-A Off / On OC1-A relay element operating
41 OC1-B Off / On OC1-B relay element operating
42 OC1-C Off / On OC1-C relay element operating
 193 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

52 EF1 Off / On EF1 relay element operating
56 SEF1 Off / On SEF1 relay element operating
60 UC1-A Off / On UC1-A relay element operating
61 UC1-B Off / On UC1-B relay element operating
62 UC1-C Off / On UC1-C relay element operating
63 UC2-A Off / On UC2-A relay element operating
64 UC2-B Off / On UC2-B relay element operating
65 UC2-C Off / On UC2-C relay element operating
66 NPS1 Off / On NPS1 relay element operating
67 NPS2 Off / On NPS2 relay element operating
68 BCD Off / On BCD relay element operating
69 CLP STATE0 Off / On Cold load Protection State
73 BI1 command Off / On Binary input signal of BI1
79 SET. group1 Off / On BI command of change active setting group1
80 SET. group2 Off / On BI command of change active setting group2
81 OC1 block Off / On BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
85 EF1 block Off / On BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
 194 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

89 SEF1 block Off / On BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
93 UC block Off / On BI command of UC protection scheme block
94 THM block Off / On BI command of THM protection scheme block
95 NPS block Off / On BI command of NPS protection scheme block
96 BCD block Off / On BI command of BCD protection scheme block
97 TC fail Off / On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
98 CB CONT OPN Off / On BI command of CB N/O contact
99 CB CONT CLS Off / On BI command of CB N/C contact
100 EXT trip-3PH Off / On BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
101 EXT trip-APH Off / On BI command of External trip (A Phase)
102 EXT trip-BPH Off / On BI command of External trip (B Phase)
103 EXT trip-CPH Off / On BI command of External trip (C Phase)
104 Remote reset Off / On BI command of Remote reset
105 Store record Off / On BI command of Store Disturbance Record
106 Alarm1 Off / On BI command of Alarm1
110 Relay fail Off / On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
111 Relay fail-A Off / On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
112 TC err Off / On Trip circuit supervision failure
113 CB err Off / On Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
114 CT err Off / On CT circuit supervision failure
115 TP COUNT ALM Off / On Trip counter alarm
116 ΣI^yA ALM Off / On ΣIY A-Phase alarm
117 ΣI^yB ALM Off / On ΣIY B-Phase alarm
118 ΣI^yC ALM Off / On ΣIY C-Phase alarm
119 OP time ALM Off / On Operate time alarm
120 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records
121 E.record CLR On Clear Event records
122 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records
123 TP COUNT On Clear Trip counter
124 ΣI^y CLR On Clear ΣIY counter
125 Max.DEM CLR On Clear Max. demand (Imax)
126 IND.reset On Reset the indication of Trip mode, Alarm etc.
Record and time data lost by power supply off
127 Data lost On
for a long time
128 Sys.Set On System setting change command
129 Rly.Set On Relay setting change command
130 Grp.Set On Group setting change command
131 OC1-A INST Off / On OC1-A relay element start
132 OC1-B INST Off / On OC1-B relay element start
133 OC1-C INST Off / On OC1-C relay element start
 195 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

134 OC2-A INST Off / On OC2-A relay element start
135 OC2-B INST Off / On OC2-B relay element start
136 OC2-C INST Off / On OC2-C relay element start
137 EF1 INST Off / On EF1 relay element start
138 EF2 INST Off / On EF2 relay element start
139 SEF1 INST Off / On SEF1 relay element start
140 SEF2 INST Off / On SEF2 relay element start
141 Local Off / On CB Control hierarchy Local state
142 Remote Off / On CB Control hierarchy Remote state
143 CB OPC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Open
144 CB CLC_L Off / On Local SW command of CB Close
145 CB OPC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Open
146 CB CLC_BI Off / On BI command of CB Close
147 CB OPC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Open
148 CB CLC_COMM Off / On Communication command of CB Close
149 LOCK_BI Off / On BI command of Interlock
150 LOCK_COMM Off / On Communication command of Intrelock
151 CB OPOUT Off / On CB Open Output
152 CB CLOUT Off / On CB Close Output
153 BO1 operate Off / On BO1 operating
161 ARC READY Off / On ARC initiation command
162 ARC INIT Off / On ARC ready command
163 MANUAL CLS Off / On ARC Manual close command
164 ARC NO_ACT Off / On ARC not applied command
165 ARC BLOCK Off / On Auto-Reclosing block
166 ARC READY_T Off / On Auto-Reclosing ready condition
167 ARC IN-PROG Off / On Auto-Reclosing in-progress condition
168 ARC_SHOT Off / On Auto-Reclosing shot
169 ARC_SHOT1 On Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
174 ARC FAIL On Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
175 ARC SUCCESS On Auto-Reclosing succeed
176 AR_COUNT CLR On ARC Counter CLR
177 ARC_COM RECV On Auto-recloser inactivate command received
178 GEN.pick-up Off/On General start/pick-up command
 196 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting List
 197 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Relay BO Terminal Signal Contents Setting

Model No. No. Name
Signal No. Logic Reset
(OR:0, (Inst:0, Del:1
AND:1) DW:2 Latch:3)
TB2:
GRE110 BO1 1-2 NON Off (Link to CB Close SW) 0 0 1
-400 BO2 3-4 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
(Link to CB Open SW)
BO3 5-6 GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General) 150 0 1
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
R.F. 9 - 10 Relay fail
TB2:
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
TB2:
GRE110 BO3 5-6 GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General) 150 0 1
-820 BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
TB2:
GRE110 BO3 5-6 GENERAL ALARM Relay alarm (General) 150 0 1
-821 BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
 198 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Relay BO Terminal Signal Contents Setting

Model No. No. Name
Signal No. Logic Reset
(OR:0, (Inst:0, Del:1
AND:1) Latch:2)
TB3
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
TB1
BO5 1-2 NON Off 0 0 1
BO6 3-4 NON Off 0 0 1
BO7 5-6 NON Off 0 0 1
BO8 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
TB3
BO4 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
TB1
BO5 1-2 NON Off 0 0 1
BO6 3-4 NON Off 0 0 1
BO7 5-6 NON Off 0 0 1
BO8 7-8 NON Off 0 0 1
 199 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix E
Relay Menu Tree
 200 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MAIN MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Control
Test
/1 Record
Fault
Event
Disturbance
Counter
/2 Fault /3 Fault /4 Fault #1

View record 16/Jul/2010
Clear #1 16/Jul/2010
18:13:57.031
Refer to Section
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Event /3 Event
View record
Clear 16/Jul/2010
Ext. trip A On
Refer to Section
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 Disturbance /3 Disturbance
View record
Clear #1 16/Jul/2010
Refer to Section
18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
 201 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter /3 Counter
View counter Trips *****
Clear Trips TripsA *****
Clear Trips A TripsB *****
Clear Trips B TripsC *****
Clear Trips C Σ I^yA ******E6
Clear Σ I^yA Σ I^yB ******E6
Clear Σ I^yB Σ I^yC ******E6
Clear Σ I^yC ARCs *****
Clear ARCs Clear Trips?
Refer to Section END=Y CANCEL=N
4.2.3.4.
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Σ I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear ARCs?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
 202 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering
Metering la **.** kA
Binary I/O
Relay element /2 Binary I/O
Time sync. IP [0000 0000]
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast /2 Ry element
A OC1-2[00 ]
Refer to Section 4.2.4. /2 Time sync.

*BI: Act.
/2 16/Jul/2010
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Control
Frequency
Refer to Section 4.2.5
/2 Version
GRE110-401A-10
Relay type
-10
Software
■Software
/2 Description
GS1EM1-01-*
Plant name
Description ■PLC data
/3 Addr.
/2 Comms
Addr. *
Addr.
Switch /3 Switch
a-1, b-1
 203 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Record /3 Event
Event BI1 comm. 3
Disturbance N/O/R/B
Counter :
/3 Disturbace /4 Time/starter
Time/Starter Time1 2.0s
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
SIG1 51
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/3 Metering TCALM 10000
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
Time zone /3 Time sync.
/2 Act. gp. =* /3 Time zone.

Common
Group1
Group2
/3 Common
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/4 Parameter ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Line name ∗∗∗∗∗∗
CT ratio
/5 CT ratio
OCCT 400
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
EFCT 200
 204 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1 c-1 d-1
/4 Trip /5 Scheme sw /6 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element PF prot.
/6 PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot. /6 EF prot.
/4 ARC
Scheme sw
ARC element /6 SEF prot.
/6 Misc. prot.
/5 Prot.element /6 PF prot.
PF prot. OC1 1.00A
EF prot.
/6 EF prot.
SEF prot.
EF1 0.30A
Misc. prot.
/3 Group2 /6 SEF prot.
Parameter SE1 0.100A
/6 Misc. prot.
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI STATUS THM 1.00A
BI STATUS
BI1
BI2 /3 BI1
BI3 Timers
BI4 /4 Timers
Functions
BI5 BI1PUD 0.00s
BI6
Alarm1 Text /4 Functions
Alarm2 Text /3 BI6
Alarm3 Text Timers
Alarm4 Text Functions
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Alarm∗ Text
a-1 b-1
 205 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-1
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, DL
151, 0, 0, 0
BO8 OR , Lat
141, 1, 2, 3
/2 LED
LED /3 LED
Virtual LED
/2 Control
/3 Virtual LED /4 LED1
IND1 BIT1 I,O
/2 Frequency IND2
/4 LED2
/1 Set.(change) BIT1 I,O
Password
Description : Password trap
Comms Set.(change)
Record Password [_ ]
Status 1234567890←
Protection
: Confirmation trap
Binary I/P
Binary O/P Change settings?
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
LED
Control
Frequency
Set.(change) Set.(change) Refer to Section

4.2.6.2.
Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
1234567890← 1234567890←
/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3. ABCDEFG
/2 Comms /3 Addr.
Addr. Addr
Switch
Refer to Section
/3 Switch
4.2.6.4. RS485
a-1 b-2
 206 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2
/2 Record /3 Event
Event BI1 comm.
Disturbance BI1 comm. 3 _
Counter N/O/R/B
:
/4 Time/starter
Refer to Section :
4.2.6.5.
/3 Disturbance /4 Scheme sw
Time/starter
Scheme sw
Binary sig. /4 Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering Display
Time sync.
Time zone /3 Time sync.
Time sync.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6. /3 Time zone
GMT _
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set.
Refer to Section
Copy gp. 4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
/4 Common
AOLED
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
 207 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2 c-2 d-2
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/5 Parameter _
Line name ABCDEFG
CT ratio
/6 CT ratio
OCEFCT
/5 Trip /6 Scheme sw /7 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element PF prot.
/7 PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot. /7 EF prot.
/5 ARC /7 SEF prot.

Scheme sw
ARC element
/7 Misc. prot.
/6 Prot.element /7 PF prot.
PF prot.
EF prot.
/7 EF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/4 Group2
Parameter
a-1, b-2 c-2
 208 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2 c-2
/3 Copy A to B
A _
B _
/3 BI Status
/2 Binary I/P BITHR1
BI Status
BI1 /3 BI1 /4 Timers
BI2 Timers
BI3 Functions
BI4 /4 Functions
BI5 /3 BI6
BI6 Timers
Alarm1 Text Functions
Alarm2 Text
Alarm3 Text ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
Alarm4 Text ABCDEFG
Refer to Section Alarm∗ Text
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO1 /4 Logic/Reset
BO1 Logic/Reset
BO2 Functions
BO3 /4 Functions
BO4 /3 BO4
Refer to Section Logic/Reset
4.2.6.9. Functions
/2 LED
LED
Virtual LED Refer to Section
4.2.6.10.
/3 LED /4 LED1 /5 Logic/Reset

LED1 Logic/Reset
LED2 Functions
LED3 LED Color /5 Functions
LED4
LED5 /4 LED6
LED6 Logic/Reset /5 LED Color
CB CLOSED Functions
LED Color
/4 CB CLOSED /5 LED Color

a-1 b-2 c-3 LED Color
 209 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
a-1 b-2 c-3
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1 /5 Reset

IND1 Reset
IND2 Functions
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
/2 Control Reset
Functions
/2 Frequency : Password trap
Control
Password [_ ]
1234567890←
/1 Control Control Control

Password(Ctrl) Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
Local/Remote 1234567890← 1234567890←
CB OPEN/CLOSE Refer to Section
4.2.7.2.
Refer to Section 4.2.7
/1 Test Test Test

Password(Test) Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
Switch 1234567890← 1234567890←
Binary O/P Refer to Section
Refer to Section 4.2.8. 4.2.8.2. : Password trap
Test
/2 Switch
Password [_ ]
A.M.F. 1 _ 1234567890←
Off/On
CLPTST 0
Off/S0/S3
IECTST 0
Off/On
/2 Binary O/P Operate?

ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1 0 _
Disable/Enable
BO4 0
Disable/Enable
 210 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix F
Case Outline
 211 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Case Outline for model 400,401,420, 421, 820 and 821
 212 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Case Outline for model 402 and 422
 213 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix G
Typical External Connection
 214 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
A SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
B BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE) Control
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
Power
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-400A TB2
CB CLOSE CB CLOSE BO1
TB1
SW
1
2
1 ** CB OPEN CB OPEN/TRIP BO2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 ** Ie AUXILIARY BO4
8 7
*
9 8
P
10 N.C. Relay fail BO5
N 11 9
12 GND POWER 10 Relay fail
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11 indicator
14 - DEFAULT BI1-2; Off 12 N
Available for Threshold
BI1
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FG 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
Available for Threshold BI2
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FRONT PANEL 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
N.C.
18
19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C.
A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
*BO3 and BO4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.
**Analogue current input ports are shorted when the terminal block is removed.
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 - 400A
 215 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A OUTPUT CONACTS
SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
B Control
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE) Power
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP P
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-401A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
14 - DEFAULT BI1-6; Off
12 N
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
AUXILIARY Threshold BI2
33.6/77/154V
FRONT PANEL Available for 15
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
USB Type B
(CB CLOSED) AUXILIARY 17
(CB OPEN) AUXILIARY 18
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 401A
 216 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
B Control
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
Power
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-420A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
7 ** Ise AUXILIARY BO4
Core 8
* 7
balance 9 8
CT P
10 N.C. Relay fail R.F.
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
12 N
BI1
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FG 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FRONT PANEL 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
18
N.C. 19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
 217 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
Power
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-421A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
Core 8
*
7
balance 9 8
CT P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
USB Type B (CB CLOSED) AUXILIARY 17
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 COM
A+
B- 24 B-
(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
 218 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A OUTPUT CONACTS
B Control
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE) BO5 OFF
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP BO6 OFF P
Power
BO3 GENERAL ALARM BO7 OFF
BO4 OFF BO8 OFF
GRE110-402A TB3
TB2
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
12 N
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
USB Type B
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45
A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
N.C. Control
TB1 Power
AUXILIARY BO5
1
2
AUXILIARY BO6
Optional Communication 3
Port *** 4
AUXILIARY BO7
100BASE-TX *
5
　1port / 2port
6
AUXILIARY BO8
7 *
8
9
100BASE-FX
　1port / 2port N.C. 10
11
12
*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
*** Available at one of the communication function is selected.
 219 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
B BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE) BO5 OFF Control
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP BO6 OFF
P
Power
BO3 GENERAL ALARM BO7 OFF
BO4 OFF BO8 OFF
GRE110-422A TB3
TB2
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL COIL
6 *
6
Core 8
*
7
balance 9 8
CT P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11 indicator
12 N
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45
A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-
N.C. Control
TB1 Power
AUXILIARY BO5
1
2
AUXILIARY BO6
3
Optional Communication 4
Port *** AUXILIARY BO7
*
5
100BASE-TX
6
AUXILIARY BO8
　1port / 2port
7 *
8
9
100BASE-FX N.C. 10
　1port / 2port
11
12
*BO3, 4, 7 and 8 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
 220 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
Power
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-821A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ic 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 Vo 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
Core 8
*
7
balance 9 8
CT P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 COM
A+
B- 24 B-
*BO3-4 are NOT applicable for direct CB coil connection.

(1-2, 3-4, 7-8)
 221 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
A OUTPUT CONACTS
B Control
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE) Power
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP P
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-401A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
8 7
*
9 8
P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
12 N
AUXILIARY Threshold
BI1
33.6/77/154V
FG Available for 13
TCS 14
33.6/77/154V
TCS
Threshold
16
77/154V
BI3-6
USB Type B
AUXILIARY 19
AUXILIARY 20
Rear PANEL 22 N
A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
RJ45 N.C. A+ 23 A+
B- 24 B-

(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 401A 2CT application
 222 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OUTPUT CONACTS
B Control
BO1 OFF(CB CLOSE)
C BO2 GENERAL TRIP
P
Power
BO3 GENERAL ALARM
BO4 OFF
GRE110-420A TB2
TB1
SW
1
2
2 Ia SW
3
3 ** Ib 4
4 AUXILIARY BO3
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
5 ** Ic 5 N
COIL
6 *
6
Core 8
* 7
balance 9 8
CT P
N 11 9
13 + SUPPLY N.C. 11
indicator
12 N
BI1
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FG 13
(CB CLOSED) 14
TCS 33.6/77/154V
FRONT PANEL 15
(CB OPEN) 16 N
USB Type B 17
18
N.C. 19
20
Rear PANEL 22 A+
B-
RS485 COM
COM 21 COM
A+ 23 A+
RJ45 N.C. B- 24 B-

(1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8)
Typical External Connection of GRE110 – 420A 2CT application
 223 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 224 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC current
Supply voltage Active setting group
Password
Setting
Control
Test
2. Line parameter
CT ratio OC: EF: SEF:
3. Contacts setting
TB2 (For model type 402 or 422, the terminal block number is TB3 )
BO1 Terminal 1-2
BO2 Terminal 3-4
BO3 Terminal 5-6
BO4 Terminal 7-8
BI1 Terminal 13-14

BI2 Terminal 15-16
BI3 Terminal 17-22
BI4 Terminal 18-22
BI5 Terminal 19-22
BI6 Terminal 20-22
TB1 (Only for model type 402 or 422)

BO5 Terminal 1-2
BO6 Terminal 3-4
BO7 Terminal 5-6
BO8 Terminal 7-8
 225 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. Relay setting sheet
Menu Name Range Contents Default

Password for None
Password(Set) 0000 – 9999
Setting change (0000)
Password for None
Password Password(Ctlr) 0000 – 9999
Control (0000)
None
Password(Test) 0000 – 9999 Password for Test
(0000)
Plant name Specified by user Plant name －
Description Memorandum －
Description Specified by user
for user
Modbu Relay ID No. 1
1 - 247
s for Modbus
Relay ID No. 1
IEC 0 - 254
for IEC
Baud rate 19.2
RS485BR 9.6 / 19.2
for Modbus
EtherP Off / IEC61850 Ethernet Protocol Off
RS485P Off / MOD / IEC103 MOD(1)
Switch for 2.4(1)
IECNFI 1.2 / 2.4
communications
Switch for 2.4(1)
IECNFV 1.2 / 2.4
communications
Switch for Normal(0)
IECBLK Normal/Blocked
communications
IEC user
IECB1 0 - 312 1
specified signal 1
IEC user
IECB2 0 - 312 2
specified signal 2
IEC user
IECB3 0 - 312 3
specified signal 3
Communi IEC user
IECB4 0 - 312 4
-cation specified signal 4
IECGT 0-8 IEC General Trip 2
IECAT 0-8 IEC Trip A phase 2
IECBT 0-8 IEC Trip B phase 2
IECCT 0-8 IEC Trip C phase 2
IECE1 0 - 312 IEC user event 1 0
IECI1 0 - 255 IEC user INF 1 0
 226 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

IECGI1 No / Yes IEC event type setting 1 No(0)
61850BLK Normal / Blocked IEC61850 Block
TSTMOD Off / On IEC61850 test mode
GSECHK Off / On Ping check
PINGCHK Off / On Ping check
IP1-1 0 - 254 IP address Ethernet port 1
IP1-2 0 – 254 IP address Ethernet port 1
SM1-1 0 – 255 Subnet mask Eth port 1
GW1-1 0 – 254 Default gate way of Eth
SI1-1 0 – 254 SNTP server address
SI1-3 0 - 254 SNTP server address
PG1-1 0 – 254 Ping check address
SMODE 0-1
DEADT 1-32400 s
GOINT 1-60 s
None/Operate/ BI1 command Both(3)
BI1 comm.
Reset/Both trigger
BI2 comm.
Reset/Both trigger
BI3 comm.
Event Reset/Both trigger
Record None/Operate/ BI4 command Both(3)
BI4 comm.
Reset/Both trigger
BI5 comm.
Reset/Both trigger
BI6 comm.
Reset/Both trigger
Recording period 0.3
Time1 0.1 – 4.9 s
before fault
Disturbance Recording period 3.0
Time2 0.1 – 4.9 s
Record after fault
OC element 2.00
OC 0.10 – 150.00 A
for disturbance
 227 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

EF element 0.60
EF 0.10 – 100.00 A
for disturbance
SEF element --(0.200)
SEF 0.025 – 2.500 A
for disturbance
NPS element 0.40
NPS 0.10 – 10.00 A
for disturbance
Trip Off / On Disturbance trigger On
BI Off / On Disturbance trigger On
OC Off / On Disturbance trigger On
EF Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
SEF Off / On Disturbance Trigger --(Off)
NPS Off / On Disturbance Trigger On
SIG1 0 - 312 51
SIG2 0 - 312 52
SIG3 0 - 312 53
SIG4 0 - 312 63
SIG5 0 - 312 102
SIG6 0 - 312 103
SIG7 0 - 312 104
Disturbance
SIG8 0 - 312 117
Record
SIG9 0 - 312 141
Disturbance Trigger
SIG10 0 - 312 142
SIG11 0 - 312 143
SIG12 0 - 312 144
SIG13 0 - 312 145
SIG14 0 - 312 0
SIG15 0 - 312 0
SIG16…30 0 - 312 0
SIG31 0 - 312 0
SIG32 0 - 312 0
Trip Circuit Off
TCSPEN Off / On / Opt-On
Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker Off
CBSMEN Off / On State Monitoring
Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm Off
TCAEN Off / On
Enable
ΣIyALM Off / On ΣIy Alarm Enable Off
Counter Operate Time Off
OPTAEN Off / On
Alarm Enable
Trip Count Alarm 10000
TCALM 1 – 10000
Threshold
ΣIy Alarm 10000
ΣIyALM 10 – 10000 E6
Threshold
YVALUE 1.0 – 2.0 Y value 2.0
Operate Time 1000
OPTALM 100 – 5000 ms
Alarm Threshold
Display Pri / Sec / Pri-A Metering Pri
Status Off / BI / Modbus / Off
Time sync. Time
103 / SNTP
 228 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

12 / 24 / 48 or 1(24 or 48
BITHR1 24 / 48 /110 or BI1,BI2 Threshold or 110)
48 / 110 /220
24 / 48 or 0(24 or 48
BITHR2 48 / 110 or BI3-BI6 Threshold or 110)
110 / 220
BI1PUD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Pick-up delay 0.00
BI1DOD 0.00 – 300.00 BI1 Drop-off delay 0.00
BI1SNS Norm / Inv BI1 Trigger Norm
BI1SGS Off / 1 / 2 BI1 Settings Group Off
OC1BLK Off / On OC1 Block Off
EF1BLK Off / On EF1 Block Off
SEF1BLK Off / On SEF1 Block -- (Off)
UCBLK Off / On UC Block Off
THMBLK Off / On THM Block Off
Binary NPSBLK Off / On NPS Block Off
Input BCDBLK Off / On BCD Block Off
Trip Circuit Off
TCFALM Off / On
BI1 Fail Alarm
Circuit Breaker Off
CBOPN Off / On
Open
Circuit Breaker Off
CBCLS Off / On
Closed
External Trip Off
EXT3PH Off / On
– 3Phase
External Trip Off
EXTAPH Off / On
– A Phase
External Trip Off
EXTBPH Off / On
– B Phase
External Trip Off
EXTCPH Off / On
– C Phase
RMTRST Off / On Remote Reset Off
SYNCLK Off / On Synchronize clock Off
Store Disturbance Off
STORCD Off / On
Record
Alarm1 Off / On Alarm screen 1 Off
Remote CB Off
RMTOPN Off / On
Open Control
 229 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Remote CB Off
RMTCLS Off / On
Close Control
CNTLCK Off / On Interlock input Off
ARC scheme block Off
ARCBLK Off / On
command
ARC not applied Off
ARCNAT Off / On
command
ARC Manual close Off
ARCMCL Off / On
command

BI2 Drop-off 0.00
BI2DOD 0.00 – 300.00
delay
BI2 BI2SNS Norm / Inv BI2 Trigger Norm
BI2 Settings Off
BI2SGS Off / 1 / 2
Group
The following items are same as BI1
BI3 Drop-off 0.00
BI3DOD 0.00 – 300.00
delay
BI3 Settings Off
BI3SGS Off / 1 / 2
Group
BI4 Drop-off 0.00
BI4DOD 0.00 – 300.00
delay
BI4 Settings Off
Binary BI4SGS Off / 1 / 2
Group
Input
BI5 Drop-off 0.00
BI5DOD 0.00 – 300.00
delay
BI5 Settings Off
BI5SGS Off / 1 / 2
Group
BI6 Drop-off 0.00
BI6DOD 0.00 – 300.00
delay
BI6 Settings Off
BI6SGS Off / 1 / 2
Group
Alarm1 Text Specified by user Alarm1 Text Alarm1
 230 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Ins / DI / Dw / Lat Reset Operation DI
In #1 0 - 312 Functions 0
BO1 In #2 0 - 312 Functions 0
Binary TBO 0.00 – 10.00 s Delay / Pulse width 0.20
Output BO2 Same as BO1
BO3 Same as BO1
BO4 Same as BO1
BO5 Same as BO1 (for model 4x2)
BO8 Same as BO1
Logic OR / AND Logic Gate Type OR
Reset Inst / Latch Reset Operation Inst
LED1 In #2 0 - 312 Functions 0
Color R/G/Y LED Color R
LED2 Same as LED1
LED3 Same as LED1
LED4 Same as LED1
LED5 Same as LED1
LED6 Same as LED1
Confi- CB CLOSED LED R
CB CLOSED Color R/G/Y
gurable Color
LED IND1 Reset Inst
IND1 Reset Inst / Latch
operation
IND2 Reset Inst
IND2 Reset Inst / Latch
operation
BIT1 0 - 312 Virtual LED 0
IND1
IND2 Same as IND1
 231 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Active gp. 1-2 Active setting group 1
ALARM LED
AOLED Off / On lighting control On
Active at alarm output
group / Control Disable / Enable Control Enable Enable
Common Interlock Disable / Enable Interlock Enable Disable
Control Hierarchy
Control Hierarchy Local / Remote -- (Local)
(if Control = Enable)
Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Frequency 50Hz
Line name Specified by user Line name －
CT ratio of
OCCT 1 – 20000 400
Phase CT
CT ratio of
EFCT 1 – 20000 200
Earth Fault CT
CT ratio of
SEFCT 1 – 20000 Sensitive -- (400)
Earth Fault CT
VT ratio for
VEVT 1 – 20000 Sensitive -- (1)
Earth Fault function
ALM&
SVCNT ALM&BLK / ALM AC input imbalance
BLK
OC1EN Off / On OC1 Enable On
D / IEC / IEEE / OC1 Delay Type D
Protection MOC1
US / C (if OC1EN=On)
OC1 IEC NI
MOC1C
NI / VI / EI / LTI Inverse Curve Type
- IEC
(if MOC1=IEC)
OC1 IEEE MI
MOC1C-
MI / VI / EI Inverse Curve Type
IEEE
(if MOC1=IEEE)
OC
OC1 US CO2
MOC1C-
CO2 / CO8 Inverse Curve Type
US
(if MOC1=US)
OC1 Reset DEF
characteristic.
OC1R DEF / DEP
(if MOC1=
IEEE,US or C)
OC1 2f Block NA
OC1-2F NA / Block
Enable
 232 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

OC2EN Off / On OC2 Enable Off
D / IEC / IEEE / OC2 Delay Type D
MOC2
US / C (if OC2EN=On)
OC2 IEC NI
MOC2C
NI / VI / EI / LTI Inverse Curve Type
- IEC
(if MOC2=IEC)
OC2 IEEE MI
MOC2C-
MI / VI / EI Inverse Curve Type
IEEE
(if MOC2=IEEE)
OC2 US CO2
MOC2C-
OC CO2 / CO8 Inverse Curve Type
US
(if MOC2=US)
OC2 Reset DEF
OC2R DEF / DEP characteristic.
(if MOC2=IEEE,US or C)
OC2-2F NA / Block OC2 2f Block Enable NA
OC3EN Off / On OC3 Enable Off
OC3-2F NA / Block OC3 2f Block Enable NA
OC4EN Off / On OC4 Enable On
OC4 2f Block NA
OC4-2F NA / Block
Enable
UC1EN Off / On UC1 Enable Off
UC
UC2EN Off / On UC2 Enable Off
EF1EN Off / On EF1 Enable On
D / IEC / IEEE / EF1 Delay Type D
Protection MEF1
US / C (if EF1EN=On)
EF1 IEC Inverse NI
MEF1C-
NI / VI / EI / LTI Curve Type
IEC
(if MEF1=IEC)
EF1 IEEE Inverse MI
MEF1C-
MI / VI / EI Curve Type
IEEE
(if MEF1=IEEE)
EF1 US Inverse CO2
MEF1C-
CO2 / CO8 Curve Type
US
(if MEF1=US)
EF1 Reset DEF
EF1R DEF / DEP Characteristic.
EF
(if MEF1=IEEE,US or C)
EF1-2F NA / Block EF1 2f Block Enable NA
EF2EN Off / On EF2 Enable Off
D / IEC / IEEE / EF2 Delay Type D
MEF2
US / C (if EF2EN=On)
EF2 IEC Inverse NI
MEF2C-
IEC
(if MEF2=IEC)
EF2 IEEE Inverse MI
MEF2C-
IEEE
(if MEF2=IEEE)
EF2 US Inverse CO2
MEF2C-
US
(if MEF2=US)
 233 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

EF2 Reset DEF
Characteristic.
EF2R DEF / DEP
(if MEF1=
IEEE,US or C)
EF EF2-2F NA / Block EF2 2f Block Enable NA
EF3EN Off / On EF3 Enable Off
EF4EN Off / On EF4 Enable On
SE1EN Off / On SEF1 Enable -- (Off)
D / IEC / IEEE / SEF1 Delay Type -- (D)
MSE1
US / C (if SE1EN=On)
SE1-DIR FWD / REV / NON SEF1 Directtional -- (NON)
SEF1 IEC Inverse -- (NI)
MSE1C-
IEC
(if MSE1=IEC)
SEF1 IEEE Inverse -- (MI)
MSE1C-
IEEE
(if MSE1=IEEE)
SEF1 US Inverse -- (CO2)
MSE1C-
Protection US
(if MSE1=US)
SEF1 Reset -- (DEF)
SE1R DEF / DEP Characteristic.
(if MSE1= IEEE,US or C)
SEF SEF1 Stage2 -- (Off)
SE1S2 Off / On Timer Enable
(if SE1EN=On)
SE1-2F NA / Block SEF1 2f Block Enable -- (NA)
D / IEC / IEEE / SEF2 Delay Type -- (D)
MSE2
US / C (if SE2EN=On)
SEF2 IEC Inverse -- (NI)
MSE2C-
IEC
(if MSE2=IEC)
SEF2 IEEE Inverse -- (MI)
MSE2C-
IEEE
(if MSE2=IEEE)
SEF2 US Inverse -- (CO2)
MSE2C-
US
(if MSE1=US)
 234 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

SEF2 Reset -- (DEF)
SE2R DEF / DEP Characteristic.
(if MSE2=IEEE,US or C)
SEF
Residual Power block -- (Off)
ZPEN Off / On
Enable
Thermal Overload Off
THMEN Off / On
THM Enable
THMAEN Off / On Thermal Alarm Enable Off
NPS1EN Off / On NPS1 Enable Off
NPS1-2F NA / Block NPS1 2f Block Enable NA
NPS
NPS2EN Off / On NPS2 Enable Off
NPS2-2F NA / Block NPS2 2f Block Enable NA
Broken conductor Off
BCDEN Off / On
BCD Enable
BCD-2F NA / Block BCD 2f Block Enable NA
BTC Off / On Back-Trip Control Off
CBF
RTC Off / DIR / OC Re-trip Control Off
Cold Load Off
CLSG Off / 1 /2
settings group
Protection CLP
Cold Load Off
CLDOEN Off / On
drop-off Enable
ARCEN Off / On Autoreclosing Enable. Off
S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / Reclosing shot max.
ARC-NUM S1
S5 number
Autoreclosing initiation by
OC1-INIT NA / On / Block NA
OC1 enable
OC1-TP1 Off -/Inst / Set OC1 trip mode of 1st trip Set
OC1-TP2 Off -/Inst / Set OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip Set
OC1-TP3 Off -/Inst / Set OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip Set
OC1-TP4 Off -/Inst / Set OC1 trip mode of 4th trip Set
ARC OC2-INIT NA / On / Block NA
OC2 enable
OC3 enable
 235 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
OC4 enable
EF1-INIT NA / On / Block NA
EF1 enable
EF1-TP1 Off -/Inst / Set EF1 trip mode of 1st trip Set
EF1-TP2 Off -/Inst / Set EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip Set
EF1-TP3 Off -/Inst / Set EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip Set
EF1-TP4 Off -/Inst / Set EF1 trip mode of 4th trip Set
EF2 enable
EF3 enable
EF4 enable
SE1-INIT NA / On / Block -- (NA)
SEF1 enable
SE1-TP1 Off -/Inst / Set SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip -- (Set)
SE1-TP2 Off -/Inst / Set SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip -- (Set)
SE1-TP3 Off -/Inst / Set SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip -- (Set)
SE1-TP4 Off -/Inst / Set SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip -- (Set)
SEF2 enable
 236 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SEF3 enable
SEF4 enable
EXT-INIT NA / On / Block External Trip Command NA
enable
ARCEN Off / On Autoreclosing Enable. Off
 237 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

OC1 0.10 – 25.00 A OC1 Threshold 1.00A
OC1 1.000
TOC1 0.010 – 1.500 Time multiplier
(if MOC1≠D)
OC1 Definite 1.00s
TOC1 0.00 – 300.00 s time setting.
(if MOC1=D)
OC1 Definite 0.0s
TOC1R 0.0 – 300.0 s time reset delay
(if OC1R=DEF)
OC1 Dependent 1.000
TOC1RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset delay
(if OC1R=DEP)
OC2 Definite 1.000s
TOC2 0.010 – 1.500 s
time setting.
OC2 Definite 0.00s
TOC2 0.00 – 300.00 s time setting.
(if MOC2=D)
OC2 Definite 0.0s
OC TOC2R 0.0 – 300.0 s time reset delay
(if OC2R=DEF)
OC2 Dependent 1.000
Protection TOC2RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset delay
(if OC2R=DEP)
OC3 Definite 0.00s
TOC3 0.00 – 300.00 s
time setting.
OC4 Definite 0.00s
TOC4 0.00 – 300.00 s
time setting.
OC1-k 0.00 – 300.00 0.14
0.00 – 5.00 Configurable 0.02
OC1-α
IDMT
OC1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000
Curve setting.
OC1-kr 0.00 – 300.00 2.00
(if MOC1=C)
OC1-β 0.00 – 5.00 2.00
OC2-k 0.00 – 300.00 0.14
OC2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Configurable 0.02
IDMT
OC2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000
Curve setting.
OC2-kr 0.00 – 300.00 2.00
(if MOC2=C)
OC2-β 0.00 – 5.00 2.00
UC1 0.10 – 10.0 A UC1 Threshold 0.40A
UC1 Definite time 0.00s
TUC1 0.00 – 300.00 s
Setting
UC
UC2 0.10 – 10.00 A UC2 Threshold 0.20A
UC2 Definite time 0.00s
TUC2 0.00 – 300.00 s
Setting
 238 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

EF1 0.05 – 25.00 A EF1 Threshold 0.30A
EF1 Time multiplier 1.000
TEF1 0.010 – 1.500
(if MEF1≠D)
EF1 Definite time 1.00s
TEF1 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if MOC1=D)
TEF1R 0.0 – 300.0 s reset delay
(if EF1R=DEF)
EF1 Dependent 1.000
TEF1RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset time
(if EF1R=DEP)
EF1-k 0.00 – 300.00 0.14
0.00 – 5.00 Configurable 0.02
EF1-α
IDMT
EF1-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000
Curve setting
EF1-kr 0.00 – 300.00 2.00
(if MEF1=C)
EF1-β 0.00 – 5.00 2.00
EF EF2 Time multiplier 1.000
TEF2 0.010 – 1.500
(if MEF2≠D)
TEF2 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if MOC2=D)
TEF2R 0.0 – 300.0 s reset delay
(if EF2R=DEF)
Protection EF1 Dependent 1.000
TEF2RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset time
(if EF2R=DEP)
EF2-k 0.00 – 300.00 0.14
EF2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Configurable 0.02
IDMT
EF2-C 0.000 – 5.000 0.000
Curve setting
EF2-kr 0.00 – 300.00 2.00
(if MEF2=C)
EF2-β 0.00 – 5.00 2.00
TEF3 0.00 – 300.00 s EF3 Definite time 0.00s
TEF4 0.00 – 300.00 s EF4 Definite time 0.00s
SEθ -95 – 95deg SEF Characteristic angle -- (0)
SEV 0.5 – 100.0V SEF ZPS voltage level -- (3.0)
SEF1 Time multiplier -- (1.000)
TSE1 0.010 – 1.500
(if MSE1≠D)
SEF1 Definite time -- (1.00)
TSE1 0.00 – 300.0 s
(if MSE1=D)
SEF SEF1 Definite -- (0.0)
TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s time reset delay
(if SE1R=DEF)
SEF1 Dependent -- (1.000)
TSE1RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset time
(if SE1R=DEP)
SEF1 Stage2 -- (0.00)
TSE1S2 0.00 – 300.00 s
Timer
 239 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

SE1-k 0.00 – 300.00 -- (0.14)
SE1-α 0.00 – 5.00 Configurable -- (0.02)
IDMT
SE1-C 0.000 – 5.000 -- (0.000)
Curve setting
SE1-kr 0.00 – 300.00 -- (2.00)
(if MSE1=C)
SE1-β 0.00 – 5.00 -- (2.00)
SE2 0.001 – 0.250 A SEF2 Threshold -- (0.500)
SEF2 Time -- (1.000)
TSE2 0.010 – 1.500 multiplier
(if MSE2≠D)
SEF2 Definite time -- (0.00)
TSE2 0.00 – 300.00 s
(if MSE2=D)
SEF2 Definite -- (0.0)
TSE2R 0.0 – 300.0 s time reset delay
SEF
(if SE2R=DEF)
SEF2 Dependent -- (1.000)
TSE2RM 0.010 – 1.500 time reset time
(if SE2R=DEP)
SE2-k 0.00 – 300.00 -- (0.14)
SE2-α 0.00 – 5.00 Configurable -- (0.02)
IDMT
SE2-C 0.000 – 5.000 -- (0.000)
Protection Curve setting
SE2-kr 0.00 – 300.00 -- (2.00)
(if MSE2=C)
SE2-β 0.00 – 5.00 -- (2.00)
TSE3 0.00 – 300.00 s SEF3 Definite time -- (0.00)
TSE4 0.00 – 300.00 s SEF4 Definite time -- (0.00)
THM 0.40 – 10.00 A Thermal Overload 1.00A
THMIP 0.00 – 5.00 A Prior load(Test) 0.00A
THM Thermal heating 10.0min
TTHM 0.5 – 500.0 min
Time Constant
THMA 50 – 99 % Thermal Alarm 80%
NPS1 0.10 – 10.00 A NPS1 Threshold 0.40A
NPS1 0.00s
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s
Definite time
NPS
NPS2 0.10 – 10.0 A NPS2 Threshold 0.20A
NPS2 0.00s
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s
Definite time
Broken Conductor 0.20A
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 A
Threshold
BCD
Broken Conductor 0.00s
TBCD 0.00 – 300.00 s
Definite time
 240 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

CBF 0.10 – 10.0 A CBF Threshold 0.50A
CBF TBTC 0.00 – 300.00 s Back Trip Definite time 1.00s
TRTC 0.00 – 300.00 s Re-trip Definite time 0.50s
TCLE 0 – 10000 s Cold load Enable timer 100s
TCLR 0 – 10000 s Cold load Reset timer 100s
CLP Cold load 0.50A
ICLDO 0.10 -10.0 A
drop-off threshold
TCLDO 0.00 – 100.00 s Cold load drop-off timer 0.00s
Sensitivity of 15%
ICD-2f 10 – 50 %
Inrush current detector
ICD
Threshold of 1.00 A
ICDOC 1.00 – 25.00 A
fundamental current
TRDY 0.0 - 600.0 s Reclaim timer 60.0
1st shot Dead timer of
TD1 0.01 - 300.00 s 10.00
Stage1
1st shot Reset timer of
TR1 0.01 - 310.00 s 310.00
Stage1
2nd shot Dead timer of
TD2 0.01 - 300.00 s 10.00
Stage1
2nd shot Reset timer of
TR2 0.01 - 310.00 s 310.00
Stage1
Protection
3rd shot Dead timer of
TD3 0.01 - 300.00 s 10.00
Stage1
3rd shot Reset timer of
TR3 0.01 - 310.00 s 310.00
Stage1
4th shot Dead timer of
TD4 0.01 - 300.00 s 10.00
Stage1
ARC
4th shot Reset timer of
TR4 0.01 - 310.00 s 310.00
Stage1
5th shot Dead timer of
TD5 0.01 - 300.00 s 10.00
Stage1
5th shot Reset timer of
TR5 0.01 - 310.00 s 310.00
Stage1
TW 0.01 - 10.00 s Out put pulse timer 2.00
Autoreclosing Pause Time
TSUC 0.0 - 600.0 s 3.0
after manually close
Autoreclosing Recovery
TRCOV 0.1 - 600.0 s 10.0
time after Final Trip
Autoreclosing Pause Time
TARCP 0.1 - 600.0 s 10.0
after manually close
ARC reset time in CB
TRSET 0.01 - 300.00 s 3.00
closing mode.
Automatic monitoring On
A.M.F Off / On
function
CLPTST Off – S0 – S3 Cold load Test Off
Reset THM Off
Test THMRST Off / On
element
Off - S1 - S2 - S3 Forcibly control of Off
SHOTNUM
- S4 - S5 - S6 Trip/ARC shot number.
IECTST Off / On IEC103 test mode Off
 241 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
 242 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
Power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit

3.3 AC input circuit
 243 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
Element Current setting Measured current

OC1-A
OC2-A
OC3-A
OC4-A
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC2-A
THM-A
THM-T
NPS1
NPS2
BCD
CBF-A
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
Element Curve setting Multiplier setting Measured time

OC1-A
EF1
EF2
SEF1
SEF2
 244 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
 245 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
 246 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRE110 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRE110 Model:

(Example: Type: GRE110 Model: 401A )
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1. Reason for returning the relay

 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on USB stick or CD rom, or fill
in the attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 247 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / /
/ : : .
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2010 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia: A
Ib: A
Ic: A
IE: A
ISE: A
I1: A
I2: A
I2 / I1 :
THM %
Fault values
Ia: A
Ib: A
Ic: A
IE: A
ISE: A
I1: A
I2: A
I2 / I1 :
THM: %
 248 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4. Describe the details of the incident:
5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/July/2010)
6. Give any comments about the GRE110, including the documents:
 249 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 250 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix K
Technical Data
 251 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current In: 1/5A (combined)
Frequency: 50/60Hz
Auxiliary supply: 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac
(Operative range: 88–300Vdc / 80–264Vac)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply: maximum 12%
DC supply interruption: maximum 50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: For alarm indication
110-250Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 300Vdc)
48-110Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 132Vdc)
24-48Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 60.0Vdc)
For trip circuit supervision
Operative range: ≥38.4V (for 110Vdc rating)
≥88V (for 220/250Vdc rating)
≥19.2V (for 48Vdc rating)
≥9.6V (for 24Vdc rating)
Overload Ratings
AC phase current inputs: 4 times rated current continuous
100 times rated current for 1 second
Burden
AC phase current inputs: ≤ 0.2VA
AC earth current inputs: ≤ 0.4VA
AC sensitive earth inputs: ≤ 1.2VA
DC power supply: ≤ 10W (quiescent)
≤ 15W (maximum)
Binary input circuit: ≤ 0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Current Transformer Requirements
Phase Inputs Typically 5P20 with rated burden according to load, (refer to
manual for detailed instructions).
Standard Earth Inputs: Core balance CT or residual connection of phase CTs.
Sensitive Earth Inputs: Core balance CT.
Phase Overcurrent Protection (50, 51)
st nd
1 , 2 Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
Delay type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 – 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
rd th
3 , 4 Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.10 - 150.00A in 0.01A steps
 252 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Earth Fault Protection (50N, 51N)

1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.05 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
Delay type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset Definite. Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 – 1.500 in 0.001 steps
rd th
3 , 4 thresholds: OFF, 0.05 – 100.00A in 0.01A steps
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50Ns, 51Ns)
st nd
1 , 2 Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.001 - 0.250A in 0.001A steps
Delay Type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
Stage 1 TMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Stage 1 DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Stage 1 Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time
Stage 1 Reset Def. Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Stage 1 RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500 in 0.001 steps
Stage 2 DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
3rd, 4th thresholds: OFF, 0.001 - 0.250A in 0.001A steps
Residual Power (ZP setting) 0.00 – 100.00W in 0.01W steps
Phase Undercurrent Protection (37)
1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps
Thermal Overload Protection (49)
Iθ = k.IFLC (Thermal setting): OFF, 0.50 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
Time constant (τ): 0.5 - 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm: OFF, 50% to 99% in 1% steps
Negative Phase Sequence Protection (46)
1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
Broken Conductor Protection (46BC)
Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1): OFF, 0.10 - 1.00 in 0.01 steps
CBF Protection (50BF)
CBF threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 10.00A in 0.01A steps
CBF stage 1 DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
CBF stage 2 DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Inrush Current Detector
Second harmonic ratio setting (I2f/I1f): 10 – 50% in 1% steps
Overcurrent thresholds: 1.00 – 25.00A in 0.01A steps
 253 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Autoreclose (79)
ARC Reclaim Time 0.0 – 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Close Pulse Width 0.01 – 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Lock-out Recovery Time OFF, 0.1 – 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Sequences 1 -5 Shots to Lock-out, each trip programmable for inst or
Delayed operation
Dead Times (Programmable for each shot) 0.01 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Accuracy
All Other Overcurrent Pick-ups: 100% of setting ± 3% (Gs>0.2A)
Overcurrent PU/DO ratio: approx, 95%
Undercurrent Pick-up: 100% of setting ± 3% (Gs>0.2A)
Undercurrent PU/DO ratio: approx, 105%
Inverse Overcurrent Operate Time: IEC60255-151, ±5% or 50ms (2 ≤ G/Gs ≤ 20)
GT = 1.1Gs, GD = 20Gs (Gs ≤ 10A), 200A (Gs > 10A)
OC Definite Operate Time: ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥200% of setting)
EF Definite Operate Time: ≤DTL + 45ms (DT, input: ≥200% of setting)
UC Operate Time: ≤DTL + 85ms (input: ≤80% of setting)
NPS Operate Time: ≤DTL + 150ms (input: ≥200% of setting)
CBF Operate Time; ≤DTL + 30ms (input: ≥200% of setting)
Transient Overreach for instantaneous <5%
elements: Time delays includes operating time of trip contacts
Front Communication port - local PC (USB)
Connector type: USB-Type B
Cable length: 5m (max.)
Rear Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type: Twisted pair
Cable length: 1200m (max.)
Connector: Screw terminals
Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate: 19.2 kbps
Rear Communication port (Ethernet)
100BASE-TX RJ-45 connector
100BASE-FX SC connector
Binary Inputs
Operating Voltage For alarm indication
Typical 154Vdc (min. 110Vdc) for 220Vdc rating
Typical 77Vdc (min. 70Vdc) for 110Vdc rating
Typical 33.6Vdc (min. 24Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Typical 16.8Vdc(min. 12Vdc) for 24Vdc rating
For trip circuit supervision
≥88V for 220/250Vdc rating
≥38.4Vdc for 110Vdc rating
≥19.2V for 48Vdc rating
≥9.6V for 24Vdc rating
 254 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Binary Outputs
Number 4 or 8 (excluding Relay Fail contact)
Ratings Make and carry: 5A continuously
model 4∗0 and 4∗1; BO#1 and #2 Contact : 0.4A 250Vdc, 8A 380Vac, 3040VA, 150W
model 4∗2: BO#1,#2,#5 and #6 Make and carry: 30A, 250Vdc for 0.5s (L/R≥40ms)
Break: 0.1A, 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
other BOs Make and carry: 4A continuously
Contact: 0.2A 110Vdc, 8A 250Vac, 2000VA, 240W
Durability: Loaded contact: ≥1,000 operations
Unloaded contact: ≥10,000 operations
Pickup time: Less than 15ms
Reset time: Less than 10ms
Mechanical design
Weight 1.5kg for model 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A
1.8kg for model 402A and 422A
Width 149mm for model 400A, 401A, 420A and 421A
223mm for model 402A and 422A
Height 177mm
Depth 168mm
Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Installation Flush mounting with attachment kits
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -20°C to +60°C.
IEC 60068-2-30 Storage / Transit: -25°C to +70°C.
Humidity IEC 60068-2-78 56 days at 40°C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 (front), IP20 (rear), IP40 (top)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
IEEE C37.90.0 2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of
5kV(peak) for CT, Power Supply Unit, BI and BO circuits;
between terminals and earth, and between independent
circuits
3kV (peak) for RS485 circuit; between terminals and earth
3kV (peak) for BO circuit; across normally open contacts
1.2/50µs, 0.5J between all terminals and between all terminals
and earth.
 255 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Test Standards Details

Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV to 3kV (peak) applied to all ports in common mode.
Disturbance / Damped IEC 61000-4-12 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
Oscillatory Wave IEEE C37.90.1
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to 1GHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-3 and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80, 160, 450,
Disturbance 900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 Class A, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4,
IEEE C37.90.1
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5, 1.2/50µs surge in common/differential modes:
IEC 61000-4-5 HV, Power Supply Unit and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Disturbance
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 Class A, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC 61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 10m):
30 to 230MHz: <40dB
230 to 1000MHz: <47dB
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive is demonstrated according to generic
EMC standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to product safety standard
EN 60255-27.
 256 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 257 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 1 1
C Other cases 0
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A A B C Output
B Output 1 0 0 1
&
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B ≥1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
XOR gates
A B Output
A
0 1 1
=1 Output
1 0 1
B
Other cases 0
 258 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output
0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY

Flip-flop
S R Output
S
0 0 No change
F/F Output
R 1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output 1 ON 1
ON Other cases 0
Switch Output
+ Output
ON ON 1
OFF 0
 259 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix M
Modbus: Interoperability
 260 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Modbus: Interoperability
1. Physical and Data Link Layer
- RS485(EIA/TIA-485) 2-wire interface
- RTU mode only
- Coding System:
8–bit binary (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit)
Even parity
- Address setting range: 1-247
- Baud rate setting range: 9600 or 19200
2. Application Layer
(1) Modbus response format
FC Description Supplementary explanation

01 Read Coils Returns remote control enable flag
02 Read Discrete Inputs Returns BIs or LED lamp status, etc.
03 Read Holding Registers -
04 Read Input Register Returns value of analog inputs
05 Write Single Coil Remote command and Time synchronization
06 Write Single Register Need to specify record number
07 Read Exception status Returns relay and CB status
08 Diagnostic -
16 Write Multiple Registers Current time setting, etc.
17 Report Slave ID Returns device ID
43 Read device Identification (SC:14) Returns device information
For FC (Function Code) = 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06 and 16, the response format is the same as described
in "Modbus Application Protocol Specification V1.1b".
For other FCs, the response format is as following:
07 Read Exception status

Response Data
Output Data (1byte)
bit Description
0 IN SERVICE (LED)
1 TRIP (LED)
2 ALARM (LED)
3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
4 CB CLOSED (LED)
5 CB OPEN (LED)
6 Relay fail output (BO)
7 <Reserved>
 261 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
08 Diagnostic
Response Data
SC Response Data Field Description
00 Echo Request Data (2Bytes) Return Query Data
01 <not supported>
02 Diagnostic Register Contents (2Bytes) Return Diagnostic Register
bit0 IN SERVICE (LED)
bit1 TRIP (LED)
bit2 ALARM (LED)
bit3 RELAY FAIL (LED)
bit4 <Reserved>
bit5 <Reserved>
bit6 <Reserved>
bit7 <Reserved>
bit8 3-phase current balance alarm
bit9 CB contact status alarm
bit10 CB operation number alarm
bit11 CB operating time alarm
bit12 ∑Iy monitoring alarm
bit13 trip circuit supervision alarm
bit14 <Reserved>
bit15 <Reserved>
03- <not supported>
17 Report Slave ID
Response Data
Byte Count (1byte) 18bytes
Slave ID (17bytes) Relay type and model ID
GRE110-401A-00-10 ASCII
Run Indicator Status (1byte) 0x00=out of service, 0xFF=in service
43 Read Device Identification (SC:14)

Response Data
Param OID
01 Basic device identification
00 TOSHIBA Vendor Name
01 GRE110-401 Product Code
02 A Major Minor Revision
02 Regular device identification
03 <Non> Vendor URL
04 GRE110 Product Name
05 401A-10-10 Model Name
06 Motor Protection User Application Name
07- <Reserved> Reserved
03 Extended device identification
80 <SPASE>
81 GS1EM1-02-A Software version
04 <not supported> One specific identification object
 262 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
(2) Modbus address map group

Modbus data model Address(ID) Number Data specification
Coils 0x0200 1 Remote control (enable flag)
Remote control (command, interlock), Time
(Read/Write) 0x0400 5
synchronization, Clear command (write only)
Discrete Input 0x1000 6 BI
0x1016 5 Relay fail output, BO
(Read Only) 0x1040 14 LED(Relay status, R/L, CB on/off status)
0x1080 16 Virtual LED
0x1201 － Signal list (see Appendix B for detail)
Analog data (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie, Thermal, Ia max etc.,
Input Registers 0x2000 24
unconverted to engineering units)
(Read Only) 2-word long
Fault record (No., Time, Phase, Type), max. 4 records,
Holding Registers 0x3000 29
write protected
Event record (No., Time, ID, Status), 10 out of max. 200
(Read/Write) 0x3200 72
records, write protected
0x3800 4 Current time data (IEC format)
0x3810 36 Counter data (number of trips, ∑Iy, etc), 2-word long
0x3E82 2 Password for remote control
0x4000 － Setting value (see Appendix H for detail)
0x8000 Undefined after this address
Discrete Inputs Single bit Read-Only

Coils Single bit Read-Write
Input Registers 16-bit word Read-Only
Holding Registers 16-bit word Read-Write
(3)Modbus address map

Address Description Supplementary explanation
Coils
Remote control (R/W)
0200 Remote control enable flag
0400 Remote control command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0401 Remote interlock command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on/off)
0402 Remote reset command Write (control) is enabled only 0x0200=1 (on)
Time synchronization
0403 Call time synchronization task (on)
command
 263 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Discrete Input
BI status (R)
1000 BI1
1001 BI2
1002 BI3 Only for GRE110-4x1A
BO status (R)
1016 Relay fail output
1017 BO1
1018 BO2
1019 BO3
101A BO4
101B BO5
101C BO6
101D BO7
101E BO8
LED lamp status (R)
1040 IN SERVICE
1041 TRIP
1042 ALARM
1043 RELAY FAIL
1044 CB CLOSED
1045 CB OPEN
1046 LOCAL
1047 REMOTE
1048 LED1
1049 LED2
104A LED3
104B LED4
104C LED5
104D LED6
Virtual LED status (R)
1080 IND1 BIT1
1081 IND1 BIT2
1082 IND1 BIT3
1083 IND1 BIT4
1084 IND1 BIT5
1085 IND1 BIT6
1086 IND1 BIT7
1087 IND1 BIT8
1088 IND2 BIT1
… IND2 BITn Address forIND2 BIT No.n = 0x1087 + n.
 264 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Signal list (R)
1201 Signal No.1 See Appendix B
1202 Signal No.2 See Appendix B
… Signal No.n Address for signal No.n = 0x1200 + n. See Appendix B

Input Registers
Analog data (R) The following are NOT converted to engineering units.
2000 Ia (H) Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
2001 Ia (L) Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
2002 Ib (H) Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
2003 Ib (L) Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
2004 Ic (H) Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
2005 Ic (L) Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
2006 Ie (H) Primary: value×0.0025×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
2007 Ie (L) Secondary: value×0.0025(A)
2008 Ise (H) Only for GRE110-42xA
2009 Ise (L)
200A I1 (H) Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
200B I1 (L) Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
200C I2 (H) Primary: value×0.005×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
200D I2 (L) Secondary: Value×0.005(A)
200E I2/I1 (H) 100x displayed value
200F I2/I1 (L)
2010 Thermal (H) Primary: value×0.01×CT_RATIO/1000(kA)
2011 Thermal (L) Secondary: value×0.01(A)
2012
2013
2014 Ia max (H)
2015 Ia max (L)
2016 Ib max (H)
2017 Ib max (L)
2018 Ic max (H)
2019 Ic max (L)
201A Ie max (H)
201B Ie max (L)
201C Ise max (H) Only for GRE110-42xA
201D Ise max (L)
201E I2 max (H)
201F I2 max (L)
2020 I2/I1 max (H) 100x displayed value
2021 I2/I1 max (L)
 265 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

The following are converted to engineering units.
Analog data (R)
(same as displayed value)
2800 Ia (H)
2801 Ia (L)
2802 Ib (H)
2803 Ib (L)
2804 Ic (H)
2805 Ic (L)
2806 Ie (H)
2807 Ie (L)
2808 Ise (H) Only for GRE110-42xA
2809 Ise (L)
280A I1 (H)
280B I1 (L)
280C I2 (H)
280D I2 (L)
280E I2/I1 (H)
280F I2/I1 (L)
2810 Thermal (H)
2811 Thermal (L)
2812
2813
2814 Ia max (H)
2815 Ia max (L)
2816 Ib max (H)
2817 Ib max (L)
2818 Ic max (H)
2819 Ic max (L)
281A Ie max (H)
281B Ie max (L)
281C Ise max (H) Only for GRE110-42xA
281D Ise max (L)
281E I2 max (H)
281F I2 max (L)
2820 I2/I1 max (H)
2821 I2/I1 max (L)
 266 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Holding Registers
Fault record (R)
3000 records count Number of record saved (max. 4)
Indication of record #1. If no data, all following data are set to
3001 No.1
0.
3002 milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3003 hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
3004 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3005 year 0-99(y)
3006 Fault phase
3007 Trip mode
3008 No.2
0.
300A hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
300B months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
300C year 0-99(y)
300D Fault phase
300E Trip mode
300F No.3
0.
3012 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3013 year 0-99(y)
3014 Fault phase
3015 Trip mode
3016 No.4
0.
3019 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
301A year 0-99(y)
301B Fault phase
301C Trip mode
 267 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Event record (R) 10 records are obtained at a time.
3200 records count Number of records saved (max. 200)
Requesting first record number (If 1, returns the latest 10
3201 set No. (R/W)
records)
Returns "Set No.". If no data, all of the following data is set to
3202 No.X
0.
3205 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3206 year 0-99(y)
3207 Event ID See Appendix C
3208 Action 1:on 、2:off
Returns "Set No.+1". If no data, all of the following data is set
3209 No.X+1
to 0.
320A milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
320B hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
320C months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
320D year 0-99(y)
320E Event ID See Appendix C
320F Action 1:on 、2:off
3210 No.X+2
to 0.
3213 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3214 year 0-99(y)
3217 No.X+3
to 0.
321A months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
321B year 0-99(y)
321C Event ID See Appendix C
321D Action 1:on 、2:off
321E No.X+4
to 0.
321F milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
3221 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3222 year 0-99(y)
 268 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

3225 No.X+5
to 0.
3228 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3229 year 0-99(y)
322A Event ID See Appendix C
322B Action 1:on 、2:off
322C No.X+6
to 0.
322D milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
322E hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
322F months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3230 year 0-99(y)
3233 No.X+7
to 0.
3236 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3237 year 0-99(y)
323A No.X+8
to 0.
323B milliseconds 0-59999 (millisecond)
323C hours/minutes 0-23(h)、0-59(m)
323D months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
323E year 0-99(y)
323F Event ID See Appendix C
3241 No.X+9
to 0.
3244 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3245 year 0-99(y)
 269 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Current time data (R/W) Current time in IEC60870-5-4 format
3802 months/days 1-12(m)、1-31(d)
3803 year 0-99(y)
Counters (R/W)
3810 Trips Phase-A (H) Can be set initial value.
3811 Trips Phase-A (L)
3812 Trips Phase-B (H) Can be set initial value.
3813 Trips Phase-B (L)
3814 Trips Phase-C (H) Can be set initial value.
3815 Trips Phase-C (L)
3816 Trips any phase (H) Can be set initial value.
3817 Trips any phase (L)
3818 ∑Iy A (H) Can be set initial value.
3819 ∑Iy A (L)
381A ∑Iy B (H) Can be set initial value.
381B ∑Iy B (L)
381C ∑Iy C (H) Can be set initial value.
381D ∑Iy C (L)
Password
3E82 Control (H) 3E82
3E83 Control (L) 3E83
Setting values
See the next table for setting
4000 4000
values.
7FFF <Reserved> 7FFF
 270 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
(4) Modbus address for setting values

Setting Group
Address Name Contents
(Menu)
6034 BI1 comm. BI 1 command trigger setting
Event Record
603C Time1 Disturbance record period before fault
6000 Time2 Disturbance record period after fault
6001 OC OC element for disturbance
6002 EF EF element for disturbance
6003 SEF SEF element for disturbance
6004 NPS NPS element for disturbance
6005 Trip Disturbance trigger
6006 BI Disturbance trigger
6007 OC Disturbance trigger
6008 EF Disturbance trigger
6009 SEF Disturbance trigger
600A NPS Disturbance trigger
600B SIG1 Disturbance trigger
600C SIG2 Disturbance trigger
600D SIG3 Disturbance trigger
600E SIG4 Disturbance trigger
600F SIG5 Disturbance trigger
6010 SIG6 Disturbance trigger
Disturbance
Record
601A SIG16 Disturbance trigger
601B SIG17 Disturbance trigger
601C SIG18 Disturbance trigger
601D SIG19 Disturbance trigger
601E SIG20 Disturbance trigger
601F SIG21 Disturbance trigger
 271 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
602A SIG32 Disturbance trigger
602B TCSPEN Trip Circuit Supervision Enable
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm
CBSMEN
602C Enable
602D TCAEN Trip Count Alarm Enable
602E ΣIyAEN ΣIy Alarm Enable
Counter
602F OPTAEN Operate Time Alarm Enable
6030 TCALM Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting
6031 ΣIyALM ΣIy Alarm Threshold setting
6032 YVALUE Y value of ΣIy monitoring
6033 OPTALM Operating Time Alarm Threshold setting
6400 Display Metering
6401 Time sync. Time synchronization method
Status 4A61 Time sync Time synchronization method by optional com.
4A62 GMT Time zone (hour)
4A6A GMTm Time zone(minutes)
6C00 BITHR1 BI threshold for BI1 & BI2
6C01 BITHR2 BI threshold for BI3-6
6C02 BI1 BI1PUD Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay
6C03 BI1 BI1DOD Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay
6C04 BI1 BI1SNS Binary Input 1 Sense
6C05 BI1 BI1SGS Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select
6C06 BI1 OC1BLK OC1 Block
6C0A BI1 EF1BLK EF1 Block
Binary Input
6C0B BI1 EF2BLK EF2 Block
6C0C BI1 EF3BLK EF3 Block
6C0D BI1 EF4BLK EF4 Block
6C0E BI1 SE1BLK SEF1 Block
6C0F BI1 SE2BLK SEF2 Block
6C10 BI1 SE3BLK SEF3 Block
6C12 BI1 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
6C13 BI1 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6C14 BI1 NPSBLK NPS Block
6C15 BI1 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
 272 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C16 BI1 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C17 BI1 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C18 BI1 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6C19 BI1 EXT3PH External Trip - 3phase
6C1A BI1 EXTAPH External Trip - Aphase
6C1B BI1 EXTBPH External Trip - Bphase
6C1C BI1 EXTCPH External Trip - Cphase
6C1D BI1 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C1E BI1 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C1F BI1 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C20 BI1 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6C24 BI1 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C25 BI1 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C26 BI1 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C27 BI1 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6C28 BI1 ARCNAT ARC not applied command.
6C29 BI1 ARCMCL ARC manual close command.
6C2A BI2 BI2PUD Binary Input 2 Pick-up delay
6C2B BI2 BI2DOD Binary Input 2 Drop-off delay
6C2C BI2 BI2SNS Binary Input 2 Sense
6C2D BI2 BI2SGS Binary Input 2 Settings Group Select
6C2E BI2 OC1BLK OC1 Block
6C2F BI2 OC2BLK OC2 Block
6C32 BI2 EF1BLK EF1 Block
Binary Input 6C37 BI2 SE2BLK SEF2 Block
6C3A BI2 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
6C3B BI2 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6C3C BI2 NPSBLK NPS Block
6C3D BI2 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
6C3E BI2 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C3F BI2 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C41 BI2 EXT3PH External Trip - 3phase
 273 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C42 BI2 EXTAPH External Trip - Aphase
6C43 BI2 EXTBPH External Trip - Bphase
6C44 BI2 EXTCPH External Trip - Cphase
6C45 BI2 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C46 BI2 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C47 BI2 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C4A BI2 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C4B BI2 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C4C BI2 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C4D BI2 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C4E BI2 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C4F BI2 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6C52 BI3 BI3PUD Binary Input 3 Pick-up delay
6C53 BI3 BI3DOD Binary Input 3 Drop-off delay
6C54 BI3 BI3SNS Binary Input 3 Sense
6C55 BI3 BI3SGS Binary Input 3 Settings Group Select
6C5A BI3 EF1BLK EF1 Block
6C5B BI3 EF2BLK EF2 Block
6C5C BI3 EF3BLK EF3 Block
6C5D BI3 EF4BLK EF4 Block
6C5E BI3 SE1BLK SEF1 Block
6C5F BI3 SE2BLK SEF2 Block
6C62 BI3 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
Binary Input
6C63 BI3 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6C64 BI3 NPSBLK NPS Block
6C65 BI3 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
6C66 BI3 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C67 BI3 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C69 BI3 EXT3PH External Trip – 3 phase
6C6A BI3 EXTAPH External Trip – A phase
6C6B BI3 EXTBPH External Trip – B phase
6C6C BI3 EXTCPH External Trip – C phase
6C6D BI3 RMTRST Remote Reset
 274 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C6E BI3 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C6F BI3 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6C74 BI3 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C75 BI3 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C76 BI3 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C77 BI3 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6C7A BI4 BI4PUD Binary Input 4 Pick-up delay
6C7B BI4 BI4DOD Binary Input 4 Drop-off delay
6C7C BI4 BI4SNS Binary Input 4 Sense
6C7D BI4 BI4SGS Binary Input 4 Settings Group Select
6C7E BI4 OC1BLK OC1 Block
6C7F BI4 OC2BLK OC2 Block
6C8A BI4 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
6C8B BI4 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6C8C BI4 NPSBLK NPS Block
6C8D BI4 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
Binary Input 6C8E BI4 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6C8F BI4 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6C91 BI4 EXT3PH External Trip – 3 phase
6C92 BI4 EXTAPH External Trip – A phase
6C93 BI4 EXTBPH External Trip – B phase
6C94 BI4 EXTCPH External Trip – C phase
6C95 BI4 RMTRST Remote Reset
6C96 BI4 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6C97 BI4 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
 275 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
6C9A BI4 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6C9B BI4 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6C9C BI4 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6C9D BI4 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6C9E BI4 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6C9F BI4 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6CA0 BI4 ARCNAT ARC not applied command.
6CA1 BI4 ARCMCL ARC manual close command.
6CA2 BI5 BI5PUD Binary Input 5 Pick-up delay
6CA3 BI5 BI5DOD Binary Input 5 Drop-off delay
6CA4 BI5 BI5SNS Binary Input 5 Sense
6CA5 BI5 BI5SGS Binary Input 5 Settings Group Select
6CA6 BI5 OC1BLK OC1 Block
6CAA BI5 EF1BLK EF1 Block
6CAB BI5 EF2BLK EF2 Block
6CAC BI5 EF3BLK EF3 Block
6CAD BI5 EF4BLK EF4 Block
6CAE BI5 SE1BLK SEF1 Block
6CAF BI5 SE2BLK SEF2 Block
6CB0 BI5 SE3BLK SEF3 Block
6CB1 BI5 SE4BLK SEF4 Block
6CB2 BI5 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
6CB3 BI5 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6CB4 BI5 NPSBLK NPS Block
6CB5 BI5 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
6CB6 BI5 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6CB7 BI5 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6CB8 BI5 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6CB9 BI5 EXT3PH External Trip – 3 phase
Binary Input
6CBA BI5 EXTAPH External Trip – A phase
6CBB BI5 EXTBPH External Trip – B phase
6CBC BI5 EXTCPH External Trip – C phase
6CBD BI5 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CBE BI5 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CBF BI5 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CC0 BI5 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CC4 BI5 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CC5 BI5 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
 276 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
6CC6 BI5 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CC7 BI5 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6CC8 BI5 ARCNAT ARC not applied command.
6CC9 BI5 ARCMCL ARC manual close command.
6CCA BI6 BI6PUD Binary Input 6 Pick-up delay
6CCB BI6 BI6DOD Binary Input 6 Drop-off delay
6CCC BI6 BI6SNS Binary Input 6 Sense
6CCD BI6 BI6SGS Binary Input 6 Settings Group Select
6CCE BI6 OC1BLK OC1 Block
6CCF BI6 OC2BLK OC2 Block
6CD0 BI6 OC3BLK OC3 Block
6CD1 BI6 OC4BLK OC4 Block
6CD2 BI6 EF1BLK EF1 Block
6CD6 BI6 SE1BLK SEF1 Block
6CDA BI6 UCBLK Undercurrent Block
6CDB BI6 THMBLK Thermal Protection Block
6CDC BI6 NPSBLK NPS Block
6CDD BI6 BCDBLK Broken Conductor Protection Block
6CDE BI6 TCFALM Trip Circuit Fail Alarm
6CDF BI6 CBOPN Circuit Breaker Open
6CE0 BI6 CBCLS Circuit Breaker Close
6CE1 BI6 EXT3PH External Trip – 3 phase
6CE2 BI6 EXTAPH External Trip – A phase
6CE3 BI6 EXTBPH External Trip – B phase
6CE4 BI6 EXTCPH External Trip – C phase
Binary Input 6CE5 BI6 RMTRST Remote Reset
6CE6 BI6 SYNCLK Synchronize clock
6CE7 BI6 STORCD Store Disturbance Record
6CE8 BI6 Alarm1 Alarm screen 1.
6CE9 BI6 Alarm2 Alarm screen 2.
6CEA BI6 Alarm3 Alarm screen 3.
6CEB BI6 Alarm4 Alarm screen 4.
6CEC BI6 RMTOPN Remote CB Open Control
6CED BI6 RMTCLS Remote CB Close Control
6CEE BI6 CNTLCK Interlock Input
6CEF BI6 ARCBLK ARC scheme block command.
6CF0 BI6 ARCNAT ARC not applied command.
6CF1 BI6 ARCMCL ARC manual close command.
 277 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
7428 BO1 Logic Logic Gate Type
7429 BO1 Reset Reset operation
7400 BO1 In #1 Functions
7450 BO1 TBO Delay/Pulse Width
742A BO2 Logic Logic Gate Type
742B BO2 Reset Reset operation
742C BO3 Logic Logic Gate Type
742D BO3 Reset Reset operation
740A BO3 In #3 Functions
740B BO3 In #4 Functions
Binary Output 742E BO4 Logic Logic Gate Type
742F BO4 Reset Reset operation
740C BO4 In #1 Functions
740D BO4 In #2 Functions
740E BO4 In #3 Functions
740F BO4 In #4 Functions
 278 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
741A BO7 In #3 Functions
741B BO7 In #4 Functions
741C BO8 In #1 Functions
741D BO8 In #2 Functions
741E BO8 In #3 Functions
741F BO8 In #4 Functions
7020 LED1 Logic LED1 Logic Gate Type
7021 LED1 Reset LED1 Reset operation
702A LED6 Logic LED6 Logic Gate Type
702B LED6 Reset LED6 Reset operation
7000 LED1 In #1 LED Functions
Configurable LED 7003 LED1 In #4 LED Functions
700A LED3 In #3 LED Functions
700B LED3 In #4 LED Functions
700C LED4 In #1 LED Functions
700D LED4 In #2 LED Functions
700E LED4 In #3 LED Functions
700F LED4 In #4 LED Functions
 279 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting Group
(Menu)
7060 LED1 Color LED Color
7066 CB CLOSED Color LED Color
7050 IND1 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7051 IND2 Reset IND1 Reset operation
7030 IND1 BIT1 Virtual LED
Configurable LED
703A IND2 BIT3 Virtual LED
703B IND2 BIT4 Virtual LED
703C IND2 BIT5 Virtual LED
703D IND2 BIT6 Virtual LED
703E IND2 BIT7 Virtual LED
703F IND2 BIT8 Virtual LED
6800 Active gp. Active setting group
6803 AOLED ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output
Active group/ 6804 Control Control enable
Common 6805 Interlock Interlock enable
6806 Control Kind Control Hierarchy (if Control = Enable)
6807 Frequency Frequency
 280 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4C00 5C00 OCCT CT ratio of OC
4C01 5C01 EFCT CT ratio of EF
4C03 5C03 SEFCT CT ratio of SEF (for SEF model)
4C05 5C05 VEVT VT ratio of SEF (for 82xA model)
4028 5028 SVCNT AC input imbalance
4001 5001 OC OC1EN OC1 Enable
4002 5002 OC MOC1 OC1 Delay Type
4003 5003 OC MOC1C-IEC OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
4004 5004 OC MOC1C-IEEE OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
4005 5005 OC MOC1C-US OC1 US Inverse Curve Type
4006 5006 OC OC1R OC1 Reset Characteristic
4038 5038 OC OC1-2F 2f Block Enable
4029 5029 OC MOC2 OC2 Delay Type
402A 502A OC MOC2C-IEC OC2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
402B 502B OC MOC2C-IEEE OC2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
402C 502C OC MOC2C-US OC2 US Inverse Curve Type
402D 502D OC OC2R OC2 Reset Characteristic
4039 5039 OC OC2-2F 2f Block Enable
403A 503A OC OC3-2F 2f Block Enable
Protection
403B 503B OC OC4-2F 2f Block Enable
400A 500A UC UC1EN UC1 Enable
400B 500B UC UC2EN UC2 Enable
400C 500C EF EF1EN EF1 Enable
400D 500D EF MEF1 EF1 Delay Type
400E 500E EF MEF1C-IEC EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
400F 500F EF MEF1C-IEEE EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
4010 5010 EF MEF1C-US EF1 US Inverse Curve Type
4011 5011 EF EF1R EF1 Reset Characteristic.
403C 503C EF EF1-2F 2f Block Enable
4012 5012 EF EF2EN EF2 Enable
402E 502E EF MEF2 EF2 Delay Type
402F 502F EF MEF2C-IEC EF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
4030 5030 EF MEF2C-IEEE EF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
4031 5031 EF MEF2C-US EF2 US Inverse Curve Type
4032 5032 EF EF2R EF2 Reset Characteristic
403D 503D EF EF2-2F 2f Block Enable
403E 503E EF EF3-2F 2f Block Enable
 281 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
403F 503F EF EF4-2F 2f Block Enable
4015 5015 SEF SE1EN SEF1 Enable
4016 5016 SEF MSE1 SEF1 Delay Type
40A7 50A7 SEF SE1-DIR SEF1 Directional
4017 5017 SEF MSE1C-IEC SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type
4018 5018 SEF MSE1C-IEEE SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
4019 5019 SEF MSE1C-US SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type
401A 501A SEF SE1R SEF1 Reset Characteristic
401B 501B SEF SE1S2 SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable
4040 5040 SEF SE1-2F 2f Block Enable
401C 501C SEF SE2EN SEF2 Enable
4033 5033 SEF MSE2 SEF2 Delay Type
4034 5034 SEF MSE2C-IEC SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type
4035 5035 SEF MSE2C-IEEE SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type
4036 5036 SEF MSE2C-US SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type
4037 5037 SEF SE2R SEF2 Reset Characteristic
401D 501D SEF SE3EN SEF3 Enable
Protection
401E 501E SEF SE4EN SEF4 Enable
40AA 50AA SEF SE4-DIR SEF4 Directional
40AB 50AB SEF ZPEN Residual Power block Enable
401F 501F Thermal THMEN Thermal OL Enable
4020 5020 Thermal THMAEN Thermal Alarm Enable
4021 5021 NPS NPS1EN NPS1 Enable
4044 5044 NPS NPS1-2F 2f Block Enable
4022 5022 NPS NPS2EN NPS2 Enable
4045 5045 NPS NPS2-2F 2f Block Enable
4023 5023 BCD BCDEN Broken Conductor Enable
4046 5046 BCD BCD-2F 2f Block Enable
4024 5024 CBF BTC Back-trip control
4025 5025 CBF RTC Re-trip control
4026 5026 Cold Load CLSG Cold Load settings group
4027 5027 Cold Load CLDOEN Cold Load drop-off enable
4800 5800 OC OC1 OC1 Threshold setting
4806 5806 OC TOC1 OC1 Time multiplier setting
4400 5400 OC TOC1 OC1 Definite time setting
Protection
4807 5807 OC TOC1R OC1 Definite time reset delay
4808 5808 OC TOC1RM OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
 282 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
483E 583E OC TOC2 OC2 Definite time setting
483F 583F OC TOC2R OC2 Definite time reset delay
4840 5840 OC TOC2RM OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
4820 5820 OC OC1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4821 5821 OC OC1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4822 5822 OC OC1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4823 5823 OC OC1-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4824 5824 OC OC1-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC1
4825 5825 OC OC2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4826 5826 OC OC2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4827 5827 OC OC2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4828 5828 OC OC2-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4829 5829 OC OC2-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of OC2
4804 5804 UC UC1 UC1 Threshold setting
4404 5404 UC TUC1 UC1 Definite time setting
4805 5805 UC UC2 UC2 Threshold setting
4405 5405 UC TUC2 UC2 Definite time setting
4809 5809 EF EF1 EF1 Threshold setting
480D 580D EF TEF1 EF1 Time multiplier setting
4406 5406 EF TEF1 EF1 Definite time setting
480E 580E EF TEF1R EF1 Definite time reset delay
480F 580F EF TEF1RM EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
480A 580A EF EF2 EF2 Threshold setting
4841 5841 EF TEF2 EF2 Time multiplier setting
4407 5407 EF TEF2 EF2 Definite time setting.
4842 5842 EF TEF2R EF2 Definite time reset delay
4843 5843 EF TEF2RM EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
480B 580B EF EF3 EF3 Threshold setting
480C 580C EF EF4 EF4 Threshold setting
482A 582A EF EF1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
482B 582B EF EF1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
482C 582C EF EF1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
482D 582D EF EF1-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
482E 582E EF EF1-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF1
482F 582F EF EF2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
4830 5830 EF EF2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
 283 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4831 5831 EF EF2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
4832 5832 EF EF2-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
4833 5833 EF EF2-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of EF2
484C 584C SEF SEθ SEF Characteristic Angle
484D 584D SEF SEV SEF ZPS voltage level
4810 5810 SEF SE1 SE1 Threshold setting
4814 5814 SEF TSE1 SEF1 Time multiplier setting
440A 540A SEF TSE1 SEF1 Definite time setting
4815 5815 SEF TSE1R SEF1 Definite time reset delay
4816 5816 SEF TSE1RM SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier
440B 540B SEF TSE1S2 SEF2 Threshold setting
4811 5811 SEF SE2 SEF2 Threshold setting
4844 5844 SEF TSE2 SEF2 Time multiplier setting
440C 540C SEF TSE2 SEF2 Definite time setting
4845 5845 SEF TSE2R SEF2 Definite time reset delay
4846 5846 SEF TSE2RM SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier
440D 540D SEF TSE3 SEF3 Definite time setting
440E 540E SEF TSE4 SEF4 Definite time setting
4834 5834 SEF SE1-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
4835 5835 SEF SE1-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
4836 5836 SEF SE1-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
4837 5837 SEF SE1-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
4838 5838 SEF SE1-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF1
4839 5839 SEF SE2-k Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
483A 583A SEF SE2-α Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
483B 583B SEF SE2-C Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
483C 583C SEF SE2-kr Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
483D 583D SEF SE2-β Configurable IDMT Curve setting of SEF2
484E 584E SEF ZP Residual Power Threshold
4817 5817 Thermal THM Thermal overload setting
481F 581F Thermal THMIP Prior load setting
4819 5819 Thermal TTHM Thermal Time Constant
4818 5818 Thermal THMA Thermal alarm setting
481A 581A NPS NPS1 NPS1 Threshold setting
440F 540F NPS TNPS1 NPS1 Definite time setting
Protection
481B 581B NPS NPS2 NPS2 Threshold setting
4410 5410 NPS TNPS2 NPS2 Definite time setting
481C 581C BCD BCD Broken Conductor Threshold setting
4411 5411 BCD TBCD Broken Conductor Definite time setting
481D 581D CBF CBF CBF Threshold setting
4412 5412 CBF TBTC Back trip Definite time setting
 284 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4413 5413 CBF TRTC Re-trip Definite time setting
4414 5414 Cold Load TCLE Cold load enable timer
4415 5415 Cold Load TCLR Cold load reset timer
481E 581E Cold Load ICLDO Cold load drop-off threshold setting
4416 5416 Cold Load TCLDO Cold load drop-off timer
484A 584A Inrush ICD-2f Sensitivity of 2f
484B 584B Inrush ICDOC Threshold of fundamental current
4050 5050 ARC AECEN Autoreclosing Enable
4051 5051 ARC ACR-NUM Reclosing shot max. number
4052 5052 ARC OC1-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by OC1
4053 5053 ARC OC1-TP1 OC1 trip mode of 1st trip
4054 5054 ARC OC1-TP2 OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip
4055 5055 ARC OC1-TP3 OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip
4056 5056 ARC OC1-TP4 OC1 trip mode of 4th trip
405A 505A ARC OC2-TP1 OC2 trip mode of 1st trip
405B 505B ARC OC2-TP2 OC2 trip mode of 2nd trip
405C 505C ARC OC2-TP3 OC2 trip mode of 3rd trip
405D 505D ARC OC2-TP4 OC2 trip mode of 4th trip
405E 505E ARC OC2-TP5 OC2 trip mode of 5th trip
405F 505F ARC OC2-TP6 OC2 trip mode of 6th trip
4063 5063 ARC OC3-TP3 OC3 trip mode of 3rd trip
406A 506A ARC OC4-TP3 OC4 trip mode of 3rd trip
406B 506B ARC OC4-TP4 OC4 trip mode of 4th trip
406C 506C ARC OC4-TP5 OC4 trip mode of 5th trip
406D 506D ARC OC4-TP6 OC4 trip mode of 6th trip
406E 506E ARC EF1-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by EF1
406F 506F ARC EF1-TP1 EF1 trip mode of 1st trip
4070 5070 ARC EF1-TP2 EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip
4071 5071 ARC EF1-TP3 EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip
4072 5072 ARC EF1-TP4 EF1 trip mode of 4th trip
 285 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
4075 5075 ARC EF2-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by EF2
4076 5076 ARC EF2-TP1 EF2 trip mode of 1st trip
407A 507A ARC EF2-TP5 EF2 trip mode of 5th trip
407B 507B ARC EF2-TP6 EF2 trip mode of 6th trip
407C 507C ARC EF3-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by EF3
407D 507D ARC EF3-TP1 EF3 trip mode of 1st trip
407E 507E ARC EF3-TP2 EF3 trip mode of 2nd trip
407F 507F ARC EF3-TP3 EF3 trip mode of 3rd trip
4083 5083 ARC EF4-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by EF4
4084 5084 ARC EF4-TP1 EF4 trip mode of 1st trip
408A 508A ARC SE1-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by SE1
408B 508B ARC SE1-TP1 SE1 trip mode of 1st trip
408C 508C ARC SE1-TP2 SE1 trip mode of 2nd trip
408D 508D ARC SE1-TP3 SE1 trip mode of 3rd trip
408E 508E ARC SE1-TP4 SE1 trip mode of 4th trip
408F 508F ARC SE1-TP5 SE1 trip mode of 5th trip
4090 5090 ARC SE1-TP6 SE1 trip mode of 6th trip
4091 5091 ARC SE2-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by SE2
4092 5092 ARC SE2-TP1 SE2 trip mode of 1st trip
4093 5093 ARC SE2-TP2 SE2 trip mode of 2nd trip
4094 5094 ARC SE2-TP3 SE2 trip mode of 3rd trip
4098 5098 ARC SE3-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by SE3
4099 5099 ARC SE3-TP1 SE3 trip mode of 1st trip
409A 509A ARC SE3-TP2 SE3 trip mode of 2nd trip
409B 509B ARC SE3-TP3 SE3 trip mode of 3rd trip
409C 509C ARC SE3-TP4 SE3 trip mode of 4th trip
409D 509D ARC SE3-TP5 SE3 trip mode of 5th trip
409E 509E ARC SE3-TP6 SE3 trip mode of 6th trip
 286 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Setting
Address
Group Name Contents
(Menu) Gr.1 Gr.2
409F 509F ARC SE4-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by SE4
40A0 50A0 ARC SE4-TP1 SE4 trip mode of 1st trip
40A1 50A1 ARC SE4-TP2 SE4 trip mode of 2nd trip
40A2 50A2 ARC SE4-TP3 SE4 trip mode of 3rd trip
40A3 50A3 ARC SE4-TP4 SE4 trip mode of 4th trip
40A6 50A6 ARC EXT-INIT Autoreclosing initiation by External signal
441E 541E ARC TRDY Reclaim timer
441F 541F ARC TD1 1st shot Dead timer of Stage1
4420 5420 ARC TR1 1st shot Reset timer of Stage1
4421 5421 ARC TD2 2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1
4422 5422 ARC TR2 2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4423 5423 ARC TD3 3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1
4424 5424 ARC TR3 3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1
4425 5425 ARC TD4 4th shot Dead timer of Stage1
4426 5426 ARC TR4 4th shot Reset timer of Stage1
4427 5427 ARC TD5 5th shot Dead timer of Stage1
4428 5428 ARC TR5 5th shot Reset timer of Stage1
4429 5429 ARC TW Output pulse timer
442A 542A ARC TSUC Autoreclosing Pause Timer after manually close
442B 542B ARC TRCOV Autoreclosig Recovery time after Final trip
442C 542C ARC TARCP Autreclosing Pause timer after manually close
442D 542D ARC TRSET ARC reset time in CB closing mode
3. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the Modbus communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control (CB on / off)
- Change of interlock position
- LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with Modbus communication is require the following three steps.
- Pass word authentication
- Enable flag setting for remote control
- Remote control
 287 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CAUTION
To control the CB at remote site, set the control hierarchy setting of relay to “Remote”.
A. Pass word authentication
To authenticate the password, enter the password for control function to the address of “3E82” . The
password is the same as that of control function.
The password retention is 1 minute.
If no password is set, please enter “0000” as password.
The sending messages transmitted with ASCII code.

Ex. “0000” -> “303030303”
Message example (Relay address:01, Password:0000, need CRC frame)

to relay 01103E8200020430303030
from relay 01103E820002
B. Enable flag setting for remote control

To enable the remote control, turn on the address of “0200 : Remote control enable flag”.
When the operation completed or time-out occurs, the flag is reset.
Flag state can be checked in the command of “FC=01 Read Coils”.
Message example
to relay 02050200FF00
from relay 02050200FF00
C. Remote control
To control the CB at remote site, turn on or off the address of “0400: Remote control
command”, ”0401: Remote interlock command” or “0402: Remote reset command”.
The “On” operation command is “FF00”. The “Off” operation command is “0000”.
The operation reply is checked by the “BO” or “LED” signals according to the relay settings.
Message example (Relay address:01、CB on, need CRC frame)

to relay 01050400FF00
from relay 01050400FF00
 288 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Message example (Relay address:01、CB off, need CRC frame)

to relay 010504000000
from relay 010504000000
 289 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix N
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 290 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of devices, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (Application Service Data Unit)
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using the Function type (FUN) / Information
numbers (INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. 8 wide-use events are provided.
3.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
3.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 and 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values is 2 seconds.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either
1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. Either 1.2 or 2.4 can be selected by the
“IECNFI” setting.
3.4 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the table below. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
3.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
3.6 Blocking of monitor direction
If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
 291 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
4. List of Information
List of Information
Type
INF Description Contents GI COT FUN
ID
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 160
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 160
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 160
5 Power On Relay power on. Not supported
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set active, if 1, 7, 9, 12,
16 Auto-recloser active GI 1 160
impossible, inactive. 20, 21
If protection using telecommunication is available, this item is
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
set to active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If not, 1, 7, 9, 12,
18 Protection active GI 1 160
set to inactive. 20, 21
1, 7, 11, 12,
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 160
20, 21
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control system.
20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 160
IECBLK: "Blocked" setting.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to control
21 Test mode GI 1 9, 11 160
system. IECTST: "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the event is
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
sent to control system.
1, 7, 9, 11,
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 160
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
24 Characteristic2 Setting group 2 active GI 1 160
12, 20, 21
25 Characteristic3 Setting group 3 active Not supported
26 Characteristic4 Setting group 4 active Not supported
27 Auxiliary input1 User specified signal 1 (Signal specified by IECB1: ON) (*1) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision Not supported
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision Not supported
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group warning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Earth Fault Indications
48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
51 Earth Fault Fwd Earth fault forward (*2) Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse (*2) Not supported
 292 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Typ
e ID
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
68 General trip BO status specified by IECGT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
69 Trip L1 BO status specified by IECAT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
70 Trip L2 BO status specified by IECBT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
71 Trip L3 BO status specified by IECCT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km selectable by
73 Fault location X In ohms Not supported
IECFL)
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip -- 2 1, 7 160
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip (OC1 trip) -- 2 1, 7 160
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip (OR logic of OC1 to OC3 trip) -- 2 1, 7 160
92 Trip IN> Inverse time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 and SEF1 trip) -- 2 1, 7 160
Definite time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 to EF3 and
93 Trip IN>> -- 2 1, 7 160
SEF1 to SEF3 trip)
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output -- 1 1, 7 160
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Note (*1): Not available if the setting is "0".

(∗2): Not available when neither the EF nor SEF element is used.
 293 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Type
ID
IECG1
IECI1 User specified 1 Signal specified by IECE1: ON (*1) 2 1, 7 160
(yes/no)
IECG2
(yes/no)
IECG3
(yes/no)
IECG4
(yes/no)
IECG5
(yes/no)
IECG6
(yes/no)
IECG7
(yes/no)
IECG8
(yes/no)
Measurands(*3)
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> -- 3.1 2, 7 160
145 Measurand I,V Ib measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.2 2, 7 160
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Ib measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.3 2, 7 160
147 Measurand IN,VEN Ie, Io measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.4 2, 7 160
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Ia, Ib, Ic measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 160
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries of
241 Not supported
a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirm Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Note (∗3): depends upon the relay model as follows:
Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4

Model (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)
IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VEN
Model 400 Ib Ib - Ib - - - Ie -
Model 420 Ib Ib - Ib - - - Ie -
Type ID=9
Model (INF=148)
IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q f
Model 400 Ia Ib Ic - - - - - -
Model 420 Ia Ib Ic - - - - - -
Above values are normalized by IECNF∗.
 294 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Type
INF Description Contents COM COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 160
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 160
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off ON/OFF 20 20 160
17 Teleprotection on/off Not supported
18 Protection on/off (*4) ON/OFF 20 20 160
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 160
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 160
24 Activate characteristic 2 Setting Group 2 ON 20 20 160
25 Activate characteristic 3 Setting Group 3 Not supported
26 Activate characteristic 4 Setting Group 4 Not supported
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of
241 Not supported
all entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243 Not supported
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of
245 Not supported
generic data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
251 Write entry abort Not supported
Note (∗4): When the relay is receiving the "Protection off" command, the " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
GRE110
Description Contents Comment
supported
Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data No
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Current L2 Ib 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Current L3 Ic 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Voltage L1-E Va No
Voltage L2-E Vb No
Voltage L3-E Vc No
Active power P P No
Reactive power Q Q No
Frequency f f No
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No
 295 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
 296 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix O
PLC Default setting
 297 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INPUT OUTPUT
10 CONSTANT 1 302 ARC READY
10 CONSTANT 1 303 ARC-S1 COND
 298 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix P
Inverse Time Characteristics
 299 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI) IEC/UK Inverse Curves (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) (Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100 100
10
10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS TMS
1.5 1 1.5
1.0
1.
0.5
0.5
1
0.2
0.1
0.2 0.1
0.1
0.1 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Normal Inverse Very Inverse
 300 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
UK Inverse Curves (LTI)

1000
10
Operating Time (s)
100
Operating Time (s)
1
TMS
TMS
10 1.5
1.5 1.0
1.0
0.5
0.1 0.5
0.2
1
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse
 301 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI) IEEE Inverse Curves (VI)

100 100
10 10
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
TMS
TM
1.5
1 1
1.0 1.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.1 0.1 0.2

0.1
0.1
0.01 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse
 302 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)

100
10
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Extremely Inverse
 303 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
US Inverse Curves (CO8) US Inverse Curves (CO2)

100 10
10
1
TMS
Operating Time (s)

Operating Time (s)
1.5
1 1.0
TMS
0.5
1.5
0.1
1.0
0.2
0.1 0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
CO8 Inverse CO2 Short Time Inverse
 304 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix Q
IEC61850: Interoperability
 305 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
1. IEC61850 Documentation
IEC61850 Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) for GRE110
The GRE110 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the
following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes GRE110

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD Yes
Common Logical Node Yes
LLN0 Yes
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions
PDIF ---
PDIR ---
PDIS ---
PDOP ---
PDUP ---
PFRC ---
PHAR Yes
PHIZ ---
PIOC ---
PMRI ---
PMSS ---
POPE ---
PPAM ---
PSCH ---
PSDE ---
PTEF ---
PTOC Yes
PTOF ---
PTOV ---
PTRC Yes
PTTR Yes
PTUC Yes
PTUV ---
PUPF ---
PTUF ---
PVOC ---
PVPH ---
PZSU ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions
RDRE ---
RADR ---
RBDR ---
RDRS ---
RBRF Yes
RDIR ---
RFLO ---
RPSB ---
RREC Yes
RSYN ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control
CALH ---
CCGR ---
CILO Yes
CPOW ---
CSWI Yes
 306 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references

GAPC ---
GGIO Yes
Nodes GRE110
GGIO_GOOSE ---
GSAL ---
I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
IARC ---
IHMI ---
ITCI ---
ITMI ---
A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
ANCR ---
ARCO ---
ATCC ---
AVCO ---
M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
MDIF ---
MHAI ---
MHAN ---
MMTR ---
MMXN ---
MMXU Yes
MSQI Yes
MSTA ---
S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
SARC ---
SIMG ---
SIML ---
SPDC ---
X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
XCBR Yes
XSWI ---
T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
TCTR ---
TVTR ---
Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
YEFN ---
YLTC ---
YPSH ---
YPTR ---
Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
ZAXN ---
ZBAT ---
ZCAB ---
ZCAP ---
ZCON ---
ZGEN ---
ZGIL ---
ZLIN ---
ZMOT ---
ZREA ---
ZRRC ---
ZSAR ---
ZTCF ---
ZTCR ---
 307 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRE110
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACD Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
CMV Yes
SAV ---
WYE Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC Yes
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING Yes
Analogue settings
ASG Yes
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL Yes
LPL Yes
CSD ---
 308 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRE110
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and pecialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node M
Class
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O Y
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
 309 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PHAR class
Data
Class
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Settings
HarRst ING Number of harmonic restrained O N
PhStr ASG Start Value O Y
PhStop ASG Stop Value O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOC class
Data
Class
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
PTRC class
Data
Class
Status Information
Tr ACT Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
 310 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PTTR class
Data
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Measured Values
Amp MV Current for thermal load model O N
Tmp MV Temperature for thermal load O N
TmpRl MV Relation between temperature and max. temperature O N
LodRsvAlm MV Load reserve to alarm O N
LodRsvTr MV Load reserve to trip O N
AgeRat MV Ageing rate O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start O Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
AlmThm ACT Thermal Alarm O Y
TmTmpSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmTmpCrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement O N
TmACrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model O N
TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N
AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N
PTUC class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start M Y
Op ACT Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
 311 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
RBRF class
Data
Status Information
Str ACD Start, timer running O Y
OpEx ACT Breaker failure trip (“external trip”) T C Y
OpIn ACT Operate, retrip (“internal trip”) T C Y
Setting
FailMod ING Breaker Failure Detection Mode (current, breaker status, both, other) O Y
FailTmms ING Breaker Failure Time Delay for bus bar trip O Y
SPlTrTmms ING Single Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
TPTrTmms ING Three Pole Retrip Time Delay O N
DetValA ASG Current Detector Value O Y
ReTrMod ING Retrip Mode O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema.
RREC class
Data
Controls
BlkRec SPC Block Reclosing O N
ChkRec SPC Check Reclosing O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic Operation (external switch status) O N
Op ACT Operate (used here to provide close to XCBR) T M Y
AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing Status M Y
Setting
Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O Y
Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O Y
Rec3Tmms ING Third Reclose Time O Y
PlsTmms ING Close Pulse Time O Y
RclTmms ING Reclaim Time O Y
 312 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CILO class
Data
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Data
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
XCBR class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
 313 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GGIO class
Data
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind1 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
 314 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
GGIO (for GOOSE) class

Data
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
 315 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O N
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O N
PhV WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O N
A WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C N
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
 316 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRE110
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13 (see IEC 61850-7-3)
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
 317 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward M Y
| both
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) Y
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
 318 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
CMV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instCVal Vector MX O N
cVal Vector MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | O N
low-low |…
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
angRef ENUMERATED CF V | A | other … O N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | O N
Vbc | Vca | Vother | Aother
Services
 319 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A| B | C| … O N
Services
 320 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, AC_CO_O N
ST
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, 0..255 AC_CO_O N
ST
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N N
_M
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_ N
E_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N N
_M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
Substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
As defined in Table 31 (see IEC 61850-7-3) and Table E.2 (see IEC 61850-8-1)
 321 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, AC_CO_O N
ST
ctlNum INT8U CO, 0..255 AC_CO_O N
ST
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N Y
_M
E_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N Y
_M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate-state | off | on | M Y
bad-state
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate-state | off | on | PICS_SUBST N
bad-state
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
ctlModel CtlModels CF M Y
Services
 322 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
origin Originator CO, AC_CO_O N
ST
ctlNum INT8U CO, 0..255 AC_CO_O N
ST
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N N
_M
E_M
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N N
_M and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_
M and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
 323 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
ING class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setVal INT32 SP AC_NSG_M Y
setVal INT32 SG, SE AC_SG_M N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
ASG class
Name
DataAttribute
setting
setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y
setMag AnalogueValue SG, SE AC_SG_M N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV Y
minVal AnalogueValue CF O N
maxVal AnalogueValue CF O N
stepSize AnalogueValue CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
Services
 324 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
DPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
hwRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
serNum VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
model VISIBLE STRING255 DC O Y
location VISIBLE STRING255 DC O N
Services
LPL class
Name
DataAttribute
vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y
configRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC AC_LN0_M Y
ldNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX shall be included in LLN0 only; AC_LN0_EX N
for example "IEC 61850-7-4:2003"
lnNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLD_M N
Services
 325 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Logical nodes for GRE110

Logical Nodes Relay Element
PHAR
PHAR1 ICD (2f)
PTOC
PTOC11 OC1
PTOC12 OC2
PTOC13 OC3
PTOC14 OC4
PTOC21 EF1
PTOC22 EF2
PTOC23 EF3
PTOC24 EF4
PTOC31 SEF1
PTOC32 SEF2
PTOC33 SEF3
PTOC34 SEF4
PTOC41 NPS1
PTOC42 NPS2
PTOC5 BC
PTRC
PTRC1 General Trip
PTTR
PTTR1 THM-A, THM-T
PTUC
PTUC1 UC1
PTUC2 UC2
RBRF
RBRF1 CBF trip / CBF retrip
RREC
RREC1 Auto reclose
 326 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GRE series IED
・NTRODUCTION
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the IEC
61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series.
Together with the MICS, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test according to IEC
61850-10.
・CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance
statement”.
 327 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Client/ Server/ IED Remarks

subscriber publisher
Client-server roles
B11 Server side (of TWO-PARTY- - c1 Y
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
B12 Client side of (TWO-PARTY- c1 - -
APPLICATION-ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
B21 SCSM: IEC61850-8-1 used Y
B22 SCSM: IEC61850-9-1 used N
B23 SCSM: IEC61850-9-2 used N
B24 SCSM: other -
Generic substation event model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side - O Y
B32 Subscriber side O - Y
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side - O N
B42 Subscriber side O - N
If Server side (B11) supported

M1 Logical device c2 c2 Y
M2 Logical node c3 c3 Y
M3 Data c4 c4 Y
M4 Data set c5 c5 Y
M5 Substitution O O N
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y
M7-5 data-reference Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y
M7-7 entryID Y
M7-8 BufTm Y
M7-9 IntgPd Y
M7-10 GI Y
M8 Unbuffered report control O O Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y
M8-5 data-reference Y
M8-6 BufTm Y
M8-7 IntgPd Y
M8-8 GI Y
Logging O O N
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N
M10 Log O O N
M11 Control M M Y
If GSE (B31/B32) is supported
GOOSE O O Y
M12-1 entryID
M12-2 DataRefInc
M13 GSSE O O N
If SVC (B41/B42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N
M16 Time M M Y
M17 File Transfer O O N
Server
S1 GetServerDirectory M Y
 328 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Application association
S2 Associate M M Y
S3 Abort M M Y
S4 Release M M Y
Logical device
S5 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory M M Y
Logical node
S6 GetLogicalNodeDirectory M M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues O M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M M Y
S9 SetDataValues O O N
S10 GetDataDirectory O M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition O M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues O M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O O N
S14 CreateDataSet O O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory O O Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M M N
Setting group control
S18 SelectActiveSG O O Y
S19 SelectEditSG O O N
S20 SetSGValues O O N
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues O O N
S22 GetSGValues O O N
S23 GetSGCBValues O O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 Report c6 c6 Y
S24-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S24-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S24-3 data-update (dupd) N
S25 GetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
S26 SetBRCBValues c6 c6 Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 Report c6 c6 Y
S27-1 data-change (dchg) Y
S27-2 quality-change (qchg) Y
S27-3 data-update (dupd) N
S28 GetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
S29 SetURCBValues c6 c6 Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues M M N
S31 SetLCBValues O M N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime c7 M N
S33 QueryLogAfter c7 M N
S34 GetLogStatusValues M M N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S35 SendGOOSEMessage c8 c8 Y
S36 GetGoReference O c9 N
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O c9 N
S38 GetGoCBValues O O Y
S39 SetGoCBValues O O Y
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S40 SendGSSEMessage c8 c8 N
S41 GetGsReference O c9 N
S42 GetGSSEDataOffset O c9 N
S43 GetGsCBValues O O N
S44 SetGsCBValues O O N
 329 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

Multicast SVC
S45 SendMSVMessage c10 c10 N
S46 GetMSVCBValues O O N
S47 SetMSVCBValues O O N
Unicast SVC
S48 SendUSVMessage c10 c10 N
S49 GetUSVCBValues O O N
S50 SetUSVCBValues O O N
Control
S51 Select M O Y
S52 SelectWithValue M O Y
S53 Cancel O O Y
S54 Operate M M Y
S55 CommandTermination M O N
S56 TimeActivatedOperate O O N
File Transfer
S57 GetFile O M N
S58 SetFile O O N
S59 DeleteFile O O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues O O N
Time
T1 Time resolution of internal clock 100ms
T2 Time accuracy of internal clock 100ms
T3 Supported TimeStamp resolution 100ms
M – Mandatory
O – Optional
c1 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared.
c2 – shall be ‘M’ if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared.
c3 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA model has been declared.
c4 – shall be ‘M’ if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time model has
been declared.
c5 – shall be ‘M’ if support for Report, GSE, or SV models has been declared.
c6 – shall declare support for at least one (BRCB or URCB)
c7 – shall declare support for at least one (QueryLogByTime or QueryLogAfter).
c8 – shall declare support for at least one (SendGOOSEMessage or SendGSSEMessage)
c9 – shall declare support if TWO-PARTY association is available.
c10 – shall declare support for at least one (SendMSVMessage or SendUSVMessage).
 330 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PICS for A-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
A1 Client/server A-Profile c1 c1 Y
A2 GOOSE/GSE c2 c2 Y
management A-Profile
A3 GSSE A-Profile c3 c3 N
A4 TimeSync A-Profile c4 c4 Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for any service specified in Table 2 are declared within the ACSI basic conformance statement.
c4 Support for at least one other A-Profile shall be declared (e.g. in A1-A3) in order to claim conformance to IEC 61850-8-1.
PICS for T-Profile support

A-Profile Profile Description Client Server IED Remarks
shortcut F/S F/S
T1 TCP/IP T-Profile c1 c1 Y
T2 OSI T-Profile c2 c2 N
T3 GOOSE/GSE T-Profile c3 c3 Y
T4 GSSE T-Profile c4 c4 N
T5 TimeSync T-Profile o o Y
c1 Shall be ‘m’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
c2 Shall be ‘o’ if support for A1 is declared. Otherwise, shall be 'i'.
 331 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Protcol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing (PIXIT) for IEC61850 interface in GRE series IED
・Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of the
IEC 61850 interface in GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series version
upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test according to
IEC 61850-10.
・Contents of this document
Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
PIXIT for Association model
ID Description Value / Clarification

As1 Maximum number of clients that can 6
set-up an association simultaneously
As2 TCP_KEEPALIVE value 7200 seconds at the default setting.
Setting range is from 1s to 43200s.
As3 Lost connection detection time After the KEEPALIVE is no response,
retrying 9 times every “X” seconds until
declaring that the association has been lost.
“X” is one tenth of TCP_KEEPALIVE value.
Ex. The lost connection detection time is 18s
(9 times x 2 s), when TCP_KEEPALIVE
value is 20 s.
As4 Is authentication supported N
As5 What association parameters are Transport selector N
necessary for successful association Session selector N
Presentation selector N
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
As6 If association parameters are N.A.
necessary for association, describe the
correct values e.g.
As7 What is the maximum and minimum Max MMS PDU size 8172
MMS PDU size Min MMS PDU size Not limited. It
depends on a request.
As8 What is the maximum startup time 180 seconds
after a power supply interrupt Check the start-up signal
(No.227)
 332 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Server model

Sr1 Which analogue value (MX) quality bits Validity:
are supported (can be set by server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N Overflow
Y OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (Only Hz)
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr2 Which status value (ST) quality bits are Validity:
supported (can be set by server) Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Y Failure
N OldData
N Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Process
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
Sr3 What is the maximum number of data Not restricted; depend on the max. MAX
values in one GetDataValues request PDU size given in previous page.
Sr4 What is the maximum number of data N.A.
values in one SetDataValues request
Sr5 Which Mode / Behavior values are On Y
supported Blocked N
Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
 333 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Data set model

Ds1 What is the maximum number of data Not limited by an internal configuration
elements in one data set (compare ICD parameter.
setting)
This IED does not have CreateDataSet
service. But any DataSet can be defined by
using engineering tool. The maximum number
depends on the memory size of IED.
Ds2 How many persistent data sets can be Not limited by an internal configuration
created by one or more clients parameter.
(this number includes predefined
datasets) The maximum number depends on the
memory size of IED.
Ds3 How many non-persistent data sets N.A.
can be created by one or more clients
PIXIT for Substitution model

Sb1 Are substituted values stored in N.A.
volatile memory?
PIXIT for Setting group control model

Sg1 What is the number of supported 2
setting groups for each logical device
(compare NumSG in the SGCB)
Sg2 What is the effect of when and how the Just SelectActiveSG service will be
non-volatile storage is updated supported according to PICS.
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) After changing setting group number with
LCD panel, you can see new setting group
with GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 Can multiple clients edit the same N.A.
setting group
Sg4 What happens if the association is lost N.A.
while editing a setting group
Sg5 Is EditSG value 0 allowed? N.A.
 334 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Reporting model

Rp1 The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
quality change Y
data update N
general interrogation Y
Rp2 The supported optional fields are sequence-number Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y
data-set-name Y
data-reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y
conf-rev Y
segmentation Y
Rp3 Can the server send segmented Y
reports
Rp4 Mechanism on second internal data Send report immediately
change notification of the same analogue
data value within buffer period
(Compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.2.9)
Rp5 Multi client URCB approach Each URCB is visible to all clients
(compare IEC 61850-7-2 $14.2.1)
Rp6 What is the format of EntryID It is made up of the circular buffer counter
at the time the event was entered.
Rp7 What is the buffer size for each BRCB For example, LLN0$ST$Health can be
or how many reports can be buffered stored 40 events.
Rp8 Pre-configured RCB attributes that N.A.
cannot be changed online when RptEna
= FALSE
(see also the ICD report settings)
Rp9 May the reported data set contain:
- structured data objects? Y
- data attributes? Y
Rp10 What is the scan cycle for binary GRE110: More than 1500 milliseconds
events? Fixed
Is this fixed, configurable
Rp11 Does the device support to pre-assign a N
RCB to a specific client in the SCL
 335 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Logging model

Lg1 What is the default value of LogEna N.A.
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.2.1,
the default value should be FALSE)
Lg2 What is the format of EntryID N.A.
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.1)
Lg3 If there are multiple Log Control N.A.
Blocks that specify the Journaling of the
same MMS NamedVariable and TrgOps
and the Event Condition
(Compare IEC 61850-8-1 $17.3.3.3.2)
Lg4 Pre-configured LCB attributes that N.A.
cannot be changed online
PIXIT for Generic substation events model

Go1 What elements of a subscribed N source MAC address
GOOSE header are checked to decide Y destination MAC address
the message is valid and the allData = as configured
values are accepted? If yes, describe Y Ethertype = 0x88B8
the conditions. Y APPID = as configured and 0
Note: the VLAN tag may be Y gocbRef = as configured
removed by a ethernet switch and N timeAllowedtoLive
should not be checked N datSet
Y goID = as configured
N t
N stNum
Y sqNum
Y test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
Go2 Can the test flag in the published N
GOOSE be turned on / off
Go3 What is the behavior when the If the configuration is incorrect, the GOOSE
GOOSE publish configuration is isn’t published.
incorrect
Go4 When is a subscribed GOOSE Message does not arrive prior to TAL.
marked as lost?
(TAL = time allowed to live value
from the last received GOOSE
message)
Go5 What is the behavior when one or [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
more subscribed GOOSE messages No fail will be detected.
isn’t received or syntactically
incorrect (missing GOOSE) [sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality information will
become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
(=1100 0000 1000 0). After receiving message with
correct sqNum order, the quality information is
set to GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
 336 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Go6 What is the behavior when a Refer to Go5.
subscribed GOOSE message is
out-of-order
Go7 What is the behavior when a GOOSE subscribe quality information will
subscribed GOOSE message is become QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
duplicated (=1100 0000 1000 0).
Go8 Does the device subscribe to Y, with the VLAN tag
GOOSE messages with/without the Y, without the VLAN tag
VLAN tag?
Go9 May the GOOSE data set contain: Subscribed Published
- structured data objects (FCD)? Y N
- timestamp data attributes? N N
Note: data attributes (FCDA) is
mandatory
Go10 Published FCD supported common -
data classes / data types are
Go11 Subscribed FCD supported -
common data classes / data types are
Go12 What is the slow retransmission 60 seconds with TAL = 120 seconds
time? Fixed.
Is it fixed or configurable?
Go13 What is the minimum supported <minTime>
retransmission time? 300 milliseconds
What is the maximum supported <maxTime>
retransmission time? -
Is it fixed or configurable? Fixed
Go14 Can the Goose publish be turned Y
on / off by using
SetGoCBValues(GoEna)
Go15 What is the fast retransmission 300 milliseconds with TAL = 600 milliseconds
scheme? Fixed.
Is it fixed or configurable?
Go16 What is the behavior when one When expected time (TAL) spends without
subscribed GOOSE message exceeds GOOSE message, GOOSE subscribe quality
the previous time Allowed to Live information will become QUESTIONABLE
(TAL) (=1100 0000 0000 0).
After that, when IED receive time exceeded

GOOSE with SqNum=0, GOOSE subscribe
quality information will become GOOD (=0000
0000 0000 0).
When IED receive time exceeded GOOSE with

SqNum!=0, GOOSE subscribe quality information
will become QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000 1000 0)
When GOOSE with TAL=0 is received, GOOSE

subscribe quality information will become
QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT (=1100
0000 1000 0)
Payload data consistency is not used to

determine if TAL is exceeded.
 337 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

subscribed GOOSE message is “test” become QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100 0000
0001 0).
Payload data is not received.
subscribed GOOSE message is become QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
“ndsCom” (=1100 0000 0100 0).
Payload data is not received.
Go19 Acceptable data type Boolean
BitSring
Integer
Unsigned Integer
But each data size shall be less than 32 bits.
Other types (TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will

be ignored by IED.
When GOOSE subscribe quality information is
GOOD, the IED receives the payload data.
Go20 Dataset structure of a subscribed This is not checked. Two GOOSEs, which have
GOOSE same header (e.g.GoID) and different dataset
structure, are treated as the same GOOSEs.
And if received GOOSEs have same header, the

fixed position of the GOOSE dataset is read. E.g.
the 1st element of the dataset is set to read, it
keeps reading the 1st element even if the dataset
structure is different.
Note:
Subscribed payload data structure is checked to
determine if IED accepts/discards the data;
however the TAL timeout is reset even when such
data is discarded.
Go21 What is the behavior when the The device starts sending GOOSE from
device starts up? stNum=1 and sqNum=1.
Go22 Is it supported to set the “ndsCom” N
as TRUE?
TAL = Time Allowed to Live
 338 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for Control model

Ct1 What control models are supported Y status-only
(compare PICS) Y direct-with-normal-security
Y sbo-with-normal-security
N direct-with-enhanced-security
N sbo-with-enhanced-security
Ct2 Is the control model fixed, Configurable
configurable and/or online changeable? (need to restart after configuration)
Ct3 Is Time activated operate supported N
Ct4 Is “operate-many” supported N
Ct5 Will the DUT activate the control N
output when the test attribute is set in Test flag FALSE TRUE
the SelectWithValue and/or Operate IED
request (when N test procedure Ctl2 is Mode
applicable) Normal Accepted Rejected
Test Rejected Accepted
Accepted:
The control request is accepted by IED.
Rejected:
The control request is rejected by IED with
AddCause “Blocked-by-Mode”.
Ct6 What are the conditions for the time N.A.
(T) attribute in the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate request?
Ct7 Is pulse configuration supported N
Ct8 What is the behavior of the DUT when Only interlock bit is checked.
the check conditions are set? This behavior is fixed.
Is this behavior fixed, configurable,
online changeable? Note:
When interlock is an enable, the control
request is rejected by IED with AddCause
“Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
Ct9 What additional cause diagnosis are Y Not-supported
supported? N Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
N Invalid-position
N Position-reached
N Parameter-change-in-execution
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
N Blocked-by-synchrocheck
N Command-already-in-execution
N Blocked-by-health
N 1-of-n-control
N Abortion-by-cancel
N Time-limit-over
N Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-non-selected
Ct10 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond Set orCat with unsupported value.
with SelectWithValue request?
 339 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

Ct11 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond N.A.
with Select request?
Ct12 How to force a “test-not-ok” respond DOns, SBOns:
with Operate request? Set orCat with unsupported value.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct13 Which origin categories are N
supported?
Ct14 What happens if the orCat is not DOns, SBOns:
supported? “test-not-ok” IED respond
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct15 Does the IED accept a DOns, SBOns: N
SelectWithValue/Operate with the same The control request is rejected by IED with
ctlVal as the current status value? AddCause “Blocked-by-Interlocking”.
DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct16 Does the IED accept a select/operate DOns,: Y
on the same control object from 2 SBOns: N
different clients at the same time? DOes, SBOes: N.A.
Ct17 Does the IED accept a SBOns: N
Select/SelectWithValue from the same SBOes: N.A.
client when the control object is already
selected (tissue 334)
Ct18 Is for SBOes the internal validation N.A.
performed during the SelectWithValue
and/or Operate step?
Ct19 Can a control operation be blocked by Y
Mod=Off or Blocked
Ct20 Does the IED support local / remote Y
operation?
Ct21 Does the IED send an DOns: N
InformationReport with LastApplError SBOns: Y
as part of the Operate response- for
control with normal security?
 340 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION model

Tm1 What quality bits are supported N LeapSecondsKnown
(may be set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Y ClockNotSynchronized
Tm2 Describe the behavior when the time The quality attribute “ClockNotSynchronized”
synchronization signal/messages are will be set to TRUE.
lost
Tm3 When is the time quality bit "Clock N.A.
failure" set?
Tm4 When is the time quality bit "Clock It depends on the condition of
not synchronised” set? synchronization. Typically 120 seconds
Tm5 Is the timestamp of a binary event N
adjusted to the configured scan cycle?
Tm6 Does the device support time zone Y
and daylight saving? Support time zone only.
Tm7 Which attibutes of the SNTP Y Leap indicator not equal to 3?
response packet are validated? N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is equal to
value sent by the SNTP client as
Transmit Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields are
checked for reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
 341 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
PIXIT for FILE TRANSFER model

Ft1 What is structure of files and N.A.
directories?
Where are the COMTRADE files

stored?
Are comtrade files zipped and what

files are included in each zip file?
Ft2 Directory names are separated from N.A.
the file name by
Ft3 The maximum file name size including N.A.
path (recommended 64 chars)
Ft4 Are directory/file name case sensitive? N.A.
Ft5 Maximum file size N.A.
Ft6 Is the requested file path included in N.A.
the file name of the MMS fileDirectory
respond?
Ft7 Is the wild char supported MMS N.A.
fileDirectory request?
Ft8 Is it allowed that 2 client get a file at N.A.
the same time?
 342 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
IEC61850 Tissues conformance statement (TICS) of the IEC61850 communication interface GRE series IED
・Introduction
According to the UCA IUG QAP the tissue conformance statement is required to perform a
conformance test and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for GRE series IED with communication firmware MVM850-01 series
version upper than A (MVM850-01-A).
・Mandatory Intop Tissues
During the October 2006 meeting IEC TC57 working group 10 decided that:
• green Tissues with the category “IntOp” are mandatory for IEC 61850 edition 1
• Tissues with the category “Ed.2” Tissues should not be implemented.
Below table gives an overview of the implemented IntOp Tissues.
 343 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Part Tissue Description

Nr Implemented Y/n.a.
8-1 116 GetNameList with empty response? Y

165 Improper Error Response for GetDataSetValues Y
183 GetNameList error handling Y
7-4 None
7-3 28 Definition of APC n.a.
54 Point def xVal, not cVal n.a.
55 Ineut = Ires ? n.a.
60 Services missing in tables Y
63 mag in CDC CMV Y
65 Deadband calculation of a Vector and trigger option Y
219 operTm in ACT n.a.
270 WYE and DEL rms values Y
7-2 30 control parameter T n.a
31 Typo n.a.
32 Typo in syntax n.a.
35 Typo Syntax Control time n.a.
36 Syntax parameter DSet-Ref missing n.a.
37 Syntax GOOSE "T" type n.a.
39 Add DstAddr to GoCB Y
40 GOOSE Message “AppID” to “GoID” Y
41 GsCB “AppID” to “GsID” n.a.
42 SV timestamp: “EntryTime” to “TimeStamp" n.a.
43 Control "T" semantic n.a.
44 AddCause - Object not sel n.a.
45 Missing AddCauses (neg range) Y
46 Synchro check cancel n.a.
47 "." in LD Name? Y
49 BRCB TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
50 LNName start with number? Y
51 ARRAY [0..num] missing n.a.
52 Ambiguity GOOSE SqNum Y
53 Add DstAddr to GsCB, SV n.a.
151 Name constraint for control blocks etc. Y
166 DataRef attribute in Log n.a.
185 Logging - Integrity periode n.a.
189 SV Format n.a.
190 BRCB: EntryId and TimeOfEntry (part of #453) Y
191 BRCB: Integrity and buffering reports (part of Y
#453)
234 New type CtxInt (Enums are mapped to 8 bit n.a.
integer)
275 Confusing statement on GI usage (part of #453) Y
278 EntryId not valid for a server (part of #453) Y
Part 6 1 Syntax Y
5 tExtensionAttributeNameEnum is restricted Y
8 SIUnit enumeration for W n.a.
10 Base type for bitstring usage Y
17 DAI/SDI elements syntax Y
169 Ordering of enum differs from 7-3 Y
NOTE: Tissue 49, 190, 191, 275 and 278 are part of the optional tissue #453, all other technical tissues in the table are
mandatory if applicable.
 344 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Optional IntOp Tissues
After the approval of the server conformance test procedures version 2.2 the following IntOp
tissues were added or changed. It is optional to implement these tissues.
Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a.
8-1 246 Control negative response (SBOns) with LastApplError Y
8-1 545 Skip file directories with no files n.a
7-2 333 Enabling of an incomplete GoCB n.a.
7-2 453 Combination of all reporting and logging tissues N
6 245 Attribute RptId in SCL N
6 529 Replace sev - Unknown by unknown n.a.
Other Implemented Tissues
Part Tissue Nr Description Implemented

Y/N/n.a.
8-1 109 GOOSE, GSE, SV Addresses Y
118 File directory n.a.
121 GOOSE subscriber behavior Y
344 TimeOfEntry misspelled Y
7-4 76 CBOpCap and SwOpCap N
7-2 38 Syntax "AppID" or "GoID" Y
6 3 Missing ENUMs Y
6 ReportControl/OptFields N
7 Duplication of attributes N
11 Schema for IP Addr? N
15 bufOvfl in Schema? Y
 345 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
2. CB remote control
To control the CB at remote site with the IEC 61850 communication, do the following.
･Operation item
- Remote control by the Select Before Operate or Direct Operate (CB Open / CB Close)
- Change of interlock position (BlkOpn or BlkCls)
- Trip LED reset
・Operating procedure
To control the CB at remote site with ICE 61850 communication is require the following three steps.
- get Logical nodes by using IEC 61850 data setting tools (such as TAMARACK tool).
- change the control logical node (XCBR, CILO or CSWI).
When CB is remote controlled from PC, showing below the control reaction depending on the CB Status.
CB Status Response
BI-a BI-b CB LED

CB Open Operation CB Close Operation
(CB_OPC_BI) (CB_CLC_BI) lighting
・Unlock: operate ・Unlock: not operate
0 0 CLOSE
・Lock※: not operate ・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: operate ・Unlock: not operate
1 0 CLOSE
・Lock: not operate ・Lock: not operate
・Unlock: not operate ・Unlock: not operate
1 1 CLOSE
・Unlock: not operate ・Unlock: operate
0 1 OPEN
※Lock condition is as follows.

• Setting the Inter lock in the Control screen of front panel LCD (see chapter 4.2.6.11) and remote
setting the CB open lock and CB close lock from PC.
• Occurring Relay Trip.
• When Local/Remote status is “Local” (see chapter 4.2.7.1).
• When Control status is “Disable” (see chapter 4.2.6.11).
 346 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Appendix R
Ordering
 347 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Ordering
Overcurrent Relay GRE110 A
Type:
Overcurrent Protection Relay GRE110
Model:
- Model 400: Three phase and earth fault
2 x BIs, 4 x BOs, 1 x Relay fail 400
- Model 420: Three phase and sensitive earth fault
Rating:
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 110-250Vdc or 100-220Vac 1
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 48-110Vdc 2
CT: 1/5A, f: 50/60Hz, 24-48Vdc A
Standard and language:
IEC (English) 0
ANSI (English) 1
Chinese 2
Communication:
RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103) 10
RS485 1port (Modbus/DNP3.0) 11
-Optional Communication for Model 402 and 422-
100BASE-TX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) A0
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
100BASE-FX 1port (Modbus/IEC61850) C0
+RS485 1port (Modbus/IEC60870-5-103)
 348 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents
No.
0.0 May. 12, 2010 -- First issue
1.0 Oct. 20, 2010 2.1 Modified the description.
2.5 Added the Section “2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection”.
2.0 Nov. 13, 2010 Appendix M Modified the description.
3.0 Sep. 12, 2011 2.1 Modified the description.
2.2.5 Modified the Section “2.2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection”.
Appendix K Modified the description.
Appendix M Modified the description.
Appendix O Modified the description.
4.0 May. 15, 2012 1 Modified the description.
2.13 Added ‘2.13 Auto reclose’.
3.1 Modified the description.
3.2.1 Modified the description.
3.2.4 Added ‘3.2.4 PLC’.
4.5 Added ‘4.5 IEC60870-5-103 interface’.
Appendix B Modified the description.
Appendix C Modified the description.
Appendix D Modified the description.
Appendix E Modified the description.
Appendix F Modified the description.
Appendix G Modified the description.
Appendix N Added ‘Appendix N IEC60870-5-103’.
4.1 May. 25, 2012 2.13 Modified the description.
Appendix M Modified the description.
4.2 Jan. 28, 2013 Appendix G Modified the diagrams.
Appendix P Modified the Ordering Cords.
5.0 May. 15, 2013 2.2.5 Modified the description.
2.2.6 Added the description.
3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.4.3 Modified the description.
3.6 Added the description.
4.1 Added the description for model 402A and 422A.
4.2.6 Modified the description (change setting items).
4.2.6.4 Modified the Addr./Param screen for IEC61850.
Added the description for IEC61850.
4.2.6.6 Modified the Status screen. Added the description.
4.6 Added the description.
5 Added the description for model 402A and 422A.
6.7.2 Modified the table 6.7.1.
Appendix B Added the signal list for IEC61850.
Appendix C Added the Event Record Items for IEC61850.
Appendix P Added the IEC61850 Interoperability.
 349 
6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2
Version Date Revised Section Contents

No.
5.1 Jun. 24, 2013 2.2.5, 2.2.6 Modified the description.
3.2.2, 3.3.3 Modified the description.
3.4.3, 3.6 Modified the description.
4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2 Modified the description.
5.2 Dec.13, 2013 2 Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
2.3 Added Dirrectional sensitive Earth fault protection.
3 Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
3.2.2 Modified the diagram..
Appendix B Added ZP signal.
Appendix F Added the GRE110-820A and 821A models
Appendix G Added the GRE110-821A model
Appendix H Added ZP setting.
Appendix K Added ZP setting.
5.3 Jun. 24, 2014 4.3 Modified the description.

5.6 Added the Optional model.
Appendix H Modified the description.
Appendix M Modified the MODBUS address.
Appendix O Added the PLC default setting
 350 

Gre110 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Gre110 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

6 F 2 T 0 1 7 2

OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY

© TOSHIBA Corporation 2013

Explanation of symbols used

5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 157

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRE110 -

2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection

IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

Operating Time (s)

Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics

grading between relays at various points in the scheme.

Definite time reset

Dependent time reset

Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.

Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves

Curve Description IEC ref. k α c kr β

IEEE Reset Curves

Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics

2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

2.1.3 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.1.5 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection OC1

Figure 2.1.6 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection EF1

Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent protection

Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent protection

2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.2.1 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.2.2 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses

Figure 2.2.3 Staged Definite Time Protection

2.2.3 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC2

Figure 2.2.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC3

Figure 2.2.6 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC4

Figure 2.2.7 Earth fault Protection EF2

Figure 2.2.8 Earth fault Protection EF3

Figure 2.2.9 Earth fault Protection EF4

TOC3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC3 definite time setting.

Element Range Step Default Remarks

2.2.5 CT Wiring and Setting of earth fault detection

TB1 TB1 TB1

(a)for Residual current (b)for Zero-phase current (c)for only Zero-phase

Figure 2.2.10 Earth fault current detection wiring

2.2.6 CT Wiring of 2 phase CT

Figure 2.2.11 2 phase CT wiring Figure 2.2.12 Phase B composition of vectors

2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

Standby earth fault protection

Restricted earth fault protection

Figure 2.3.1 High Impedance REF

Figure 2.3.2 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF1

Figure 2.3.3 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF2

Figure 2.3.4 Definite Time SEF Protection SEF3

Figure 2.3.5 Definite Time SEF Scheme Logic

SE3 0.001 – 0.250 A 0.001 A 0.100 A SEF3 threshold setting

High impedance REF protection

Figure 2.3.4 Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition

Vk = CT knee point voltage

Figure 2.3.5 Directional Operate SEF Characteristic

Overcurrent (1-4 stage)